·TIIE BOYBAY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTIOX.
SECOND BOOK
OF
SANSKRIT,
BEING A TREATISE ON GRAMMAR VITII
EXERCISES.
BY
RAMKRISHNA GOPAL BHANDARKAR, M.A.,
HEAD MASTER, HIGII SCHOOL, RATXIGIMI;
ACTING PROFESSOR OF SANSCRIT, ELPHINSTONE COLLEGE.
SECUVD EDITION.
Registered according to Act XX. of 1847, and Act XXV.
of 1867, and Right of Translation reserved.
Bombay:
GOVERNMENT CENTRAL BOOK DEPOT.
1870.
Price Cne Rupees

·BOMBAY:
PRINTED AT THE EDUCATION SOCIETY'S PRESS, BYCULEA,
:.

·पौरजानपदशिक्षणपद्धत्युपदेष्टुराज्ञयेयं
संस्कृतमन्दिरान्तःप्रवेशिका
नाम पाठावलिः
मुम्लापुरस्थयुरोपोयपण्डितसमाजदत्त
मास्तर आव आतेयुपपदधारिणा
भाण्डारकरोपाभिधेन गोपालसूनुना रामकृष्णेन
विरचिता.
सा च मुम्बापुरवर्तिराजकीयग्रन्थशालाधिकारिणा
प्रकाशिता.
शाके १७२२.
मुल्य मेको रूपक :

·CONTENTS PAGE PREFACE vii mond ...... LESSON I. Potential Mood..... II. FIFTH AND EIGHTH CONJUGATIONS,- Present Tense 7 III. Imperfect Tease.... 11 IV. Imperative and Potential 14 V. NINTH CONJUGATION,—Present and Imperative. 18 VI. Imperfect and Potential.. 21 VII. Second CONJUGATION.-Present and Imperative. 24 VIII. -Imperfect and Potential 33 IX. THIRD CONJUGATION 38 X. SEVENTH CONJUGATION 43 XI. Perfect... 47 54 XII. -(continued) XIII. Declensional Irregularities 60 XIV. Numerals .... 70 XV. Comparative and Superlative Degrees of Adjectires, &c. 78 ....... XVI. COMPOUND NOUNS-Dvandva and Tatpurusha ... XVII. -Bahuvrîhi and Aryayîbhava 90 XVIII, Causals .. 96

·ri
SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT.
.
123
XIX. AORIST--First, Second, and Third Varieties.......... 100
XX. Sixth and Seventh Varieties
108
XXI. Fourth and Fifth Varieties
112
XXII. Part I. First and Second Future, and Conditional. 120
Part II. Benedictive Mood and passive forms
125
XXIII. Desideratives.......
XXIV. VERBAL DERIVATIVES,--Past, Perfect, Future, and
Potential Participles, &c....
... 134
SELECTIONS FOR EXERCISE, -- From the Aitareya Brâhmaņa. 140
The Three Rogues ...
143
The Brahmaņa and the Cobra
145
From Bhartrihari's Nîti Sataka
From Kâdambarî
154
.......
146

·PREFACE. Tais Second Book of Sanscrit has been prepared under instruc tions from Sir A. Grant, Director of Public Instruction. Its plai is nearly the same as that of the First Book, which the student is supposed to have read and mastered. Each lesson consists of four parts :--Ist, Grammar; 2nd, Sanscrit sentences for translation into English; 3rd, English sentences for translation into Sanscrit-both intended to exercise the student in the rules of Grammar, given at the top of the Lesson ; and 4th, a Vocabulary. This and the First Book together contain as much Grammar as is needed for all practical purposes, perhaps more. I have adopted the terminology of the English Grammarians of Sanscrit, but have strictly followed Pâņini, as explained by Bhattoji Dikshita in his Siddhanta Kaumudî. Most of the rules are mere translations of the sâtras. Besides the terms Guņa, Vriddhi, and a few others, which have been adopted from Native Grammarians by nearly all European writers on the subject, I have found it necessary to approprinte two more, viz. Set and Anit. The prejudice against mere Native terms, in deference to which Professor Benfey seems in his smaller Grammar to have discarded even the words Guņa and Vriddhi, without substituting any others, is in my humble opinion very nnreasonable, when it is difficult to frame new words to designate the things which they signify. It is very inconvenient to have to describe the same thing again and again whenever one has occasion to speak of it. It will at the same time be somewhat difficult for the learner to make out, when a thing is so described in a variety of cases, that it is the same. Words adapted to express a particular meaning are as necessary here as in other affairs of human life. What an amount of inconvenience would it, for instance, entail, if, whenever we had to speak of the human race, we were, instead of being allowed to use the word “ man," made to describe man's physical and rational natures? But I must not elevate an ordinary truism to the rank of a newly-discovered truth. The general rules of Grammar, and such exceptions as are important, have been given in this book; those of the least importance ·vui SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. only being omitted. Such an omission is apt to render a book liable to the charge of inaccuracy. But it is unavoidable in an elementary, work, and after all it will produce little or no practical in convenience. There is one point in Sanscrit Grammar, in my explanation of which I have departed from ordinary usage; though I think I do agree with Pâņini and his Commentators. It is the sense to be attached to the so-called Aorist. The most laborious student of a dead language is not alive to all the nice shades of meaning, which are plain even to the uninstructed when a language is living. Even to a Maba Pandita in these days the sound of raat is not at all so disagreeable as that of*is to the genuine Marâțhî peasant. We know of the distinction between the Atmanepada and Parasmaipada only in theory; but that between the r and of the Marathî habitual Past, or the hand of the Future we feel. We must, therefore, to determine this question. about the Aorist, appeal to such Sanscrit : works as we have reason to suppose must have been written when Sanscrit was a spoken language. The Kavyas, the Nâțakas, and most of the Purâņas will not do for our purpose. Such books as the Sanhitâs of the Vedas, the Brahmaņas, or even those portions of the two great Epics which do not bear indications of having been subsequently tampered with, must be referred to. To institute such a wide research I have neither had the necessary time nor the necessary means. But the Aitareya Brahmaņa, which I have read, seems almost to decide the point. In this work, wherever stories are told, the so-called Imperfect or the Perfect is always used, and the Aorist On the contrary, when the persons in the story are represented as speaking with one another they use the Aorist, and the only sense that can be attached to it in these cases is that of the English Present Perfect; in other words, it indicates simply the completion of an action or an action that has just or recently been never occurs. * In the passage noticed below, we have FFATE where प्रापत्, प्रापत is the Aorist of 3714 with T, and is used in the narration of a past event, but in the whole of the Brahmaņa there is, so far as I can recollect, not a single instance besides this where the narrator uses the Aorist in speaking of a past action. The evidence being then so overwhelming, some other explanation must be attempted in the present rase, and this example ought by no means to be taken to invalidate the position in the text. Perhaps when the reading of Vedic books was fixed, प्रापत् and प्राप्नोत्, which ccurs immediately after, were, through anistake, made to exchange places.

·PREFACE is 6 ( done. The reason why the Aorist occurs in these cases only is that there is no scope for recent past time in mere narrations; and things that have just or recently occurred can come to be spoken of only when persons are talking with each other. The piece given at the end of this Book contains passages remarkably illustrating what I say. The story goes on :- Harischandra said to Varuņa, Let a son be born to me and I will then offer him as a sacrifice to you.' Well,' said Varuņa. Then a son was born to him. Then said Varuņa, 'You have got a son, sacrifice him to me now.' Then said Harischandra, 'When a victim becomes ten days old, then he is fit to be sacrificed. Let the boy become ten days old, I will then sacrifice him to you.'. Well,' said Varuņa. The boy became ten days old. Then said Varuņa, 'He has become ten days old, sacrifice him now to me; "" and thus it proceeds. Now in this and the remaining portion of the Khand..the verbs " said” (occurring several times), was born, became," and others that are used by the narrator speaking in his own person, are always in the perfect; while “have got," " has become,” &c., used by Varuņa with reference to the boy, are in the Aorist. The latter clearly refer to a time just gone by. In the same manner in the story of Nâbhânedishtha, related in the fourteenth Khanda of the Fifth Panchikâ, the verbs अभाक्त, अभाक्षः, अदु:, and अदित used by Nabhinedishtha, and evillently, from the context, denoting erents that have just happened, are in the corist, as also patet: nised by Rudra. While when the author, in narrating the story, speaks of certain things as having taken place, he invariably uses the Imperfect, these events from his point of view haring occurrel at a remote past time. Similar in stances in which the Aorist on the one hand, and the Imperfect or the Perfect on the other, are used exactly in the same way, occur in 1-23, ?-19, 3-33, 1-17,* 0-33, 6-3.1, 7-27, 7-28, 8-237 ; while narratives, in which the Perfect or the Imperfect is only used, and where there is either 110 conversation, or when there is, it is only * The cow's held a sacrificial session with the object of getting horns; after a year they got horns, and then say to themselves :- largSTATA1914 797781a: i. e." The object for which we undertook this sacrificial ceremony we have got. We now rise or hreak up." Here 34 Tota is the Aorist of 3779 to obtain, and evidently means “ liave got or obtained ;" while stelraff is the Imperfect of 7, and certainly dues not indicate an event that has just happened. † Some of these passages have been given in the Lessons on the Aorist.

·X SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. with reference to present or future time, are innumerable. 7-26 and 5-34 may also be consulted. We thus see that the so-called Aorist denotes recent past time, and thus resembles the English Present Perfect. And this is confirmed by what Pâņini says on the subject. The Sůtras which give the senses of the three past tenses are es, 3–2-110; 3772aate, 3-2-111; Tiê Fame 3-2-115. They are thus to be interpreted :- s, or the Aorist, indicates past time ; ms, or the Imperfect, shows a past action done previous to this day; and fame, or the Perfect, a past event which took place before this day, and which was not witnessed by the speaker. Now the first Sâ tra gives a general rule, the second is an exception to it, and the third an exception to this again ; the past time, therefore, left, according to Pâņini's system of rules and exceptions, for me to indicate is 37979; that is to say, this day's. can also by these Sätras indicate past time generally, i. e. express simply the completion of an action without reference to any particular time. For, the category past time can admit of three divisions only according to the principle indicated in the Sûtras, viz. past time generally and not specifically, the past time of this day and the past time previous to this day. The last is taken up by ng and for, and the first two belong therefore to me. By another Sätra 179aqafra992271109T: Pâņini 3-3-135, expresses recent and continuous past action, in addition. So that according to Pâņini, E. indicates (1) past time generally, (2) the past time of this day and not previous to this day, and (3) recent past time. Now all these characteristics we find in the English Present Perfect and not in the Indefinite Past. For, first, if we want to express simply the completion of an action, i.e. past time generally without reference to any particular past time, we do not use the Indefinite Past in English, but the Present Perfect. "I read Sir Walter Scott's Ivanhoe' necessarily implies some particular time when the action of reading was done ; in other words, the sense of the sentence is not complete without the specification of some time. We must add some such expression as 'two years ago,' or the particular time must be understood from the context. But when we say I have read Sir Walter Scott's Ivanhoe there is no such necessity. Secondly, the English Present Perfect like the Sanscrit c. can denote, if it denotes any specific time at all, the past time of this day only. For • I have read the book to-day' is good English ; but I have read the ·PREFACE. si book yesterday' or ' a year ago 'is not. And, thirdly, the Present Perfect, as is generally admitted, denotes recent time in English. We thus see that the English names given to these Sanscrit tenses are not proper. Instead of dorist, ss should rather be called the Imperfect, and 275 Aorist instead of Imperfect, which is the name it bears in English Grammars of Sanscrit. My object has been to render this as much a Sanscrit Reading Book as a book on Sanscrit Grammar ; in other words, not only to teach Grammatical forms to the student but to enable him to construe Sanscrit. I have therefore, in addition to the sentences composed by myself, given in nearly all the Lessons a good many extracts containing examples of the particular rules, from original Sanscrit works, such as the Aitareya Brâhmaņa, the Upanishads, the Mahâbhârata, Kadambarî, the Națakas, the Panchatantra, and the Raghuvans'a. With the same object, three long prose pieces, illustrative of three different styles, and one poetical, have been given at the end. One of the former is from the Aitareya Brahmaņa, choseli on account of its richness in verbal forms, and the strength, purity, and simplicity of its style. The English sentences have of course all been composed by me. Most of the Vocabularies were prepared under my superintendence by three of my Sanscrit pupils, to whom my acknowledgments are due. I hope Teachers and Students will find this book useful. Such improvements as experience may show to be necessary will be made in subsequent clitions. R. G. B Ratnagiri, 8th April 1868.

·PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. My original intention was that the First and Second Books should, between them, contain as much grammar as was needed for all practical purposes. Being still influenced by the same idea, I introduced some additional matter in the copy sent to the Press for this Edition. It was not till after some progress had been made in printing that I was informed that a book on Sanscrit Grammar for the use of the Department was in the Press. In a future edition of this book, therefore, if such a one is required at all, the matter will have to be reduced. The observations made in the Preface to the last edition as to the sense of the Aorist have been confirmed by several passages I have met with in the Sanhitâs of the Vedas and in Brâhmaņas other than the Aitareya. But since this is hardly the place for an elaborate essay on the subject, I forbear to make any addition to what I have already said on the subject. I have only re-cast the remarks contained in the Preface on the meaning of the Sâtras of Pâņini bearing on the question. R. G. B. Bombay, 19th April, 1870.

·CORRECTIONS. " " or 13, " 16," " read उत्पथम्. 29, " 35," 36, " 36," give » Page 4, line 20, for Feat read Fed 6, 24, दंश, सञ्० दंश, सञ् Paaras. स्वञ्ज Atm. 7, 1, or उ 2, भोऽध्व० भोअव० 18, a full point after पौरा: 20, 24, for' उत्पथं 2, अस्मिन् ज० अस्मिज० 15, a semicolon after पृच्छत् 6, for Hiread HFT 27, gave 41, 9, read आत्मानं between पश्चात् & अन्तरदधात् 44,, 20, for ट भी० 45, 1, हम० 6, लक्ष्मीम् 25, , अववक्तार अमवक्तार 9, अव m.&c. प्र m. speaker, अप्रवक्तृ one who does not speak; i. e. teach. 17, of with. 10, भिषक् भिषज् 7, त् ब० पाइ० 3, मौर्य मौर्ण्यम् 87, 16, a full point after मि ,, 92, , 25, for मि आम० read म्याम० read gufto हं अ० " " " लक्ष्मी 45," 66, , 70," 77," " " 78," 81," 81," 82," 20, " "

·( xiv )
"
"
last,
20,
Page 96, line 22, for necessarily read not (before 'when')
96, 23, प्रग्लपयति प्रग्लापयति
97,
अस्मिन्लो अस्मिल्लो०
नां उ
नामु
116, 21, a full point after पालापति.
27, for bष read.
षि
137, 23,
दृष्ट दृष्टं
150, 24, चंद्र
चन्द्र
, 100,
"
181, "
J

·II. CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS. भ्रम् 36, 6 > > 63, > » 24, Page 6, Art. 10, adil! has also श्रम्यति' 3, line 2, for read 'पृ » 47, Note + 3, 'न' ll 'क्षद्' 'क्षुद्' 49, Art. 6, add 'ET, , and I necessarily admit T bofore and af 62 9, aul The vocative singular is set 13, at the end and the vocative' Voc. Sing. 9-9T:' 3, 65, 37, insert "Path after 24, and for ' nine' reall "ten' 86, 4, line 2, omit 7,9T, FT and,' and add at the end 'ऋच, पुर, and धुर् (when it does not mean the yoke of a carriage) at the end of any compound, and the when it ends a Tatpurûsha have BT added to them ; c. g. अर्धर्चः, विष्णुपुरम्, रणधुरा, परमगवः' 96, 3, line 4, for ' necessarily read 'not.' „, 102 and 103 in the lists, read out for FH, and for क्षद्. >> > „115, 106, line 3, for "Bryal' read "3799577' 112, Art. 2, line 5, insert after inte (long), and 3, 1, for 'गृह read. 'ग्रह 16, add, ' Before & the 37 of Set roots ending in म्, except चम् with आ, कम् and वम्, is not changed. The Âtm. Second and Third Aorists are not used in the Passive.' 1:9, 2, a, after in, add 'J short or,' 5, c, insert 'fi' before fi 135, Jast linc, ald, 'or erat? 2) ·- SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. रन् LESSON. I. THE Sanscrit Verb has ten tenses and moods together. In four of these the verbs undergo peculiar modifications, with reference to which they are divided into nine conjugational classes.* These forms are called conjugational tenses and moods. The learner has been introduced to three of these in the First Book. We will now proceed to the fourth. Potential Mood. 1. Terminations-same as those of the Imperfect. Exceptions. 3rd person plural, Parasm. Term. उस Atm. 1st person singular, अ. 3rd & 2nd pers. dual, आताम् & आथाम. 2. ई is to be prefixed to the terminations having an initial consonant, and sy to those having an initial vowel. Parasmaipada. Sing. Dual. Plural. वसेयम् वसेव वसेम वसे वसेतम् वसेत 3rd वसेताम् वसेयुः Atmanepada. मोदेय मोदेवहि मोदेमहि 2nd मोदेथाः मोदेयाथाम मोदेध्वम् 3rd. मोदेत मोदेयाताम् मोदेरन " 1 st pers. 2ndi, वसेत " 1st pers. Sanscrit Grammarians reckon ten, but the augment 344 which the ori. ginal root undergoes in the tenth conjugation, appears not only in the four tensos and moods indicated in the text, but in several others also. 1 sbs + ·2 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 3. The potential expresses (1) probability, commands, prayers, wishes, hopes, &c., and (2) is used in dependent clauses implying these. (3) It is also used in conditional* sentences in which one statement depends on another as its reason or condition. In these two latter respects it resembles the English Subjunctive. (See Howard's Grammar.) Verma विपदाभिभूतोऽपि नाहं धर्म त्यजेयम्, इच्छामि सोम विबेद्भवान्. गायेयं यदि गुणग्रहीतारं लभेय. किं भो । नृत्यं शिक्षेयोत गानम्. ? अयोध्यावासिनो भद्रमुखस्य पुत्री काश्यामध्ययनेन निमित्तेन न्यबसताम. तत्र च वर्षद्वयं स्थित्वा तयोः कनीयाज्यायांसं वदति- हे भ्रातरस्मिन् ग्रामे निरुत्साहं मे मनः संवृत्तम्. नस्मादावां स्वभूमिं गन्तुं प्रतिष्ठेवहि. अत्र हि चिरं वसतो मातरमपश्यतश्च मे प्राणा नश्येयुस्तथाभूते सति मातापितरौ । शोकपरायणी संवर्नेयाताम्. तवापि मातृदर्शनोत्सुक्यं भवेदेव. तबद्यावयोर्गमनमनुमन्येरन् गुरवः कृतिनी भवेव. ज्यायानवद- प्रति त्वमेव गच्छेमनोगतं च भाषेथा यदि तेषामनुज्ञां लभेवहि श्वः प्रातरेव निर्गच्छेव. स गत्वा तथावददनन्त- रमध्ययनविघ्नं प्रेक्षमाणा गुरवो चिन्तयन, नावगच्छामः कतरदत्र विधीयतां यदेतावनुमन्येमहि नैव गच्छतमिति वा समादिशेम. गुरू गामनुमति लब्ध्वा तावयोध्यामगच्छताम्. गते हि दुर्दशां लोके क्षुद्रोप्यहितमाचरेत् । पनिमग्ने करिणि भेको भवति मूर्धगः ॥ सप्रमाटेन बलिना दुर्बलस्याप्रमादिनः । युद्धे बलवतो नाशो भवेत् तस्य प्रमादतः ॥ * Escept pluperfect conditionals. +भोम् drops its स when followed by a vowel or a soft consonant. 17A added to suustantives gives them the sense of the ablative and sometinies of the locative.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT.
सर्वावयवसंपूर्णा सुवृत्तामुदहेन्नरः ।
क्रयक्रीता च या कन्या पत्नी सा न विधीयते ॥
अन्योन्यस्याव्यमीचारो भवेदामरणान्तिकः ।
एष धर्मः समासेन ज्ञेयः स्त्रीपुंसयोः परः॥
तथा नित्यं यतेयातां स्त्रीपुंसौ तु कृतक्रियौ ।
यथा नाभिचरेतां तो वियुक्तावितरेतरम् ।।
सुखं वा यदि वा दुःखं प्रियं वा यदि वाप्रियम् ।
प्राप्तं प्राप्तमनुभवे दृदयेनापराजितः ॥
प्रिये नातिभृशं हृष्येदप्रिये न च संवरेत् ।।
न मुह्येदर्थकच्छेषु न च धर्म परित्यजन् ।
सत्यं मृदु प्रियं वाक्यं धीरी हितकरं वदेत् ।
आत्मोत्कर्ष तथा निन्दा परेषां परिवर्जयेत् ।।
भरतेनात्मना चाहं शपे ते मनुजाधिप ।
यथा नान्येन तुष्येयमृते रामविवासनात्. ।
The king led his soldiers out of the city that he might
fight with his enemy and rout him.
We should obtain fame if we died in defence of our
country.
No man shall covet another's possessions.
Witnesses shall always tell the truth in Courts of Justice.
You should not bear the insults given by others.
If I go to Kâs'i I will bring you Sanscrit Books.
If you were to tell a lie your master would beat you.
If thou wert to taste the fruit of that tree thou wouldst die.
Would the poor Brâhmaņas get any money if they should
beg through the town?
*
preceded by any of the first four letters of a class, is changed to tile
fourth letter of that class optionally.

·4 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. If my masters saw me doing this they would turn me out of the school. money to A woman whose husband is dead may marry another even in Kaliyuga. A wife and husband should worship Agni every day in the house. O father and mother, I gave much my sisters that you might be pleased. Two persons talking to each other might easily be suspected. The two books may be carried in two hands. O happy pair ! my only wish is that you should enjoy yourselves in each other's company. VOCABULARY I. fazwe adv. greatly. So death, and 3477 end) last- 374979777 n. study. ing till death, or ending with 379 f. permission. death. #fa f. assent, approval. gatat pron. each other. Syarat pron. mutual, each va ind. or. [abl.) other. Fa prep. without (used with the 375#fet adj. (27 not, and 991-n. desire, anxiety. fe careless) not careless, कलियुग or कलि n. the fourth age careful. of the world according to zpaqen. (zal m. wealth, and Hindu mythology difficulty) pecuniary diffi wafana adj. whose ceremony is culty performed, married. 37987 m. a limb, a part. sfaa adj. satisfied. भव्यभिचार or अव्य भीचार m. (अ geanta adj. (bargain, sita not, and afHatt n. separa bought) bought with money, tion) not separation, union. or by a bargain. आत्मोत्कर्ष m. (341219 own, and 93 adj. mean. Prism.exaltation) self-exalt JTT N. singing ation. TUTTEą m. n. one who appre- आमरणान्तिक adj. (आ up to, म ciates merit.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 5 मनadj. soft. Twith 341, to observe any with अनु, to assent to, to rules of conduct, with a7fH to approve of. injure, to ruin. मनुजाधिप m. (मनुन m. man, and with 7 10th conj., to turn 37f84 m. a lord) a kingo out. men. foy with att átm. to rout. a Tua 1. a wish ; a thought. fa adj. capable of being known. tior adj. standing on the head. [ with y 1st conj. Paras. to be angry (hot), to be TF to enjoy one's self. afflicted. रामविवासन 2. (राम, and विवासन rat m. (dual) wife and husn. banishment) banishment of Râma. band. as with FR to converse, to Fax with #q and 377, to order. speak. Seanf (GF bad, cat f. state) alla n. two years. bad state. gånadj. weak 99 with fa, to dwell. "WT with fa, to do, to create, to वह with उद् to marry. faa n. possessions.. command. BTT adj. wise, of fortitude or faufiif. misfortune. patience. fagan adj. separated, disjoined. fafan. motive, reason, cause. a 10th conj. with afs, to face adj. devoid of energy, abandon, to leave off. desponding टत् with सम्, to become. 2719841 f. a court of justice. 1st co:rj. Paras. and Atm. at m. an enemy, another, preto swear. cminent, great. Trauf adj. wholly engrossed TR17: adv. from carelessness. in grief. grat adv. in the morning. FIATE adj. careless. qan adj. strong FATTA M. company, association. afea adj. strong. FHÀG adv. succinctly, shortly. H55€ n. the name of a per सावयवसंपूर्णadj. (सर्वall अवयव, and gui full of) possessed 457 m. son of Kaikeyî, one of of, or possessing all limbs. the wives of Das'aratha, and GET adj. well-bchaved. half-brother of Râma. Tigy m. a woman and a man, भू with att and with 37f7, to wife and husband. overpower; to overwhelm. with F Atm. to set out. Ham. a frog fait adj. beneficial ; salutary. Hreind. a vocative particle. 1 sbs* son.

·6 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. n Irregularities belonging to the 1st, 4th, 6th, and 10th Conjugations (not already noticed..) 1. To 'to protect' Paras., C 'to heat' Paras., fax to go' or approach' Paras., yur Paras., when it means 'to praise,' and ya 'to praise' Paras, all of the 1st conjugation, have 34ty added on to them before the conjugational sign. The 3 of my takes its Guņa substitute before this आय, as गोपायनि, पणार्यात &c. आय is optionally retained in the nonconjugational tenses. 2. धाश्, स्वाम, भ्रम, क्रम, कम, चस्, चुट, लष, and यस् with सम् or without any preposition, all Paras., belong both to the 1st and to the 4th conjugation. 3. The penultimate af of 4 is lengthened when it takes Parasmaipada terminations in the conjugational tenses, as afa or ata fa; but Atm., 31; similarly, $, and Ist conj. with 34T, lengthen their vowels. 4. 37, and a when it means 'to shave,' belong to the 1st and 5th conjugations. 5. T'to blow,' 'to smell,' at 'to think,' Ħ'to go,'? when it means "to run,' and 'to cut,' all of the 1st conjugation, substitute in the conjugational tenses धम्, जिघ्र, मन्, कच्छ, धी and भीय respectively. The last is Atmanepadî in the conjugational tenses. 6. The penultimate 3 of Te is lengthened before any strong or Guņa-making termination. 7. 34, 55, 53, all Paras. and 1537 Paras. and Atm. all of the 1st conjugation, drop their nasal before the conjugational sign. 8. When a radical F (long) does not undergo Guņa or Vriddhi substitute, it is changed to IT and to Et if a labial precedes. The Tor 8 of these is lengthened when a consonant follows. Thus, 4th conj. forms oflefa, sa 6th conj. farfa, and a 10th conj. aflatafa &c. 9. Roots of the 4th conjugation ending in 21 drop it before the conjugational sign; से forms स्थति, दो, यति &c. 10. fza, fea, wx, 74, 74, 75, 77, all of the 4th conjugation, and HR and 27 when of the 4th conjugation, lengthen their vowel in the conjugational tenses. 11. y 4th conj. is modified into fax before the 7 of that conjugation.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 7 মৃ and 12. The ending or 37 short or long is changed to T or a respectively before 3, the sign of the 6th conjugation (see Rule IX. Lesson VII.) 13. 7857 and 77, both of the 6th conjugation, are modified into वृश्च in the conjugational tenses. 14. 4, fou, fere, &a, and for, all of the 6th conj., insert a nasal before the final in the conjugational tenses. 16. Some roots of the 10th conjugation are exclusively Atmanepadi, such as तन्नू, चित्, भत्र्स, मन्च, त, विद् &c. 16. Many roots belong optionally to the 1st or 10th conjugation, such as युज्, पृच्, सह, वृज, व, तृ, रिच, तप्, तृप्, दृभ, अई, &c. LESSON IT. FIFTH AND EIGHT CONJUGATIONS. Prosent. (Parasmaipada and Åtmanepala.) 1. The ten conjugations of the Sanscrit grammarians may be grouped into two classes, the first comprising the 1st, 4th, 6th, and 10th, and the second, the remaining. The general characteristic of the first is that the base * ends in 37, and of the second, that it does not end in 37. Gencral Rules with regaril to the Conjugutional Tonses of the Second Olass. 2. Before certain terminations the roots, together with the conjugational signs, undergo peculiar modifications. With reference to these, we will divide the terminations into two classes, calling one set strong, and the other weak. Parasnaipada. 3. The singulars are strong. Exception. The singulars of the Potential and the second person singular of the Imperative. 4. The duals and plurals are weak. Exception. The duals and plurals of the Imperative first person. * That to which the termination is appended is called the base.

·8 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. . Atmanepada. 5. All the terminations are weak, Eæception.—Those of the first person Imperative. 6. Before strong terminations the ending vowel and the penultimate short take Guņa substitute. 7. In the second class of conjugations the Parasmaipada terminations of the Present are the same as those of the first class, but the Åtmanepada differ in the following particulars :- (1) The vowel occurring in some of the Atmanepada terminations given in the First Book is replaced by 3TT. (2) The first person singular termination is . (3) The T in the third person plural is dropped. 8. नु in the fifth, and उ in the eighth, conjugation are added on to the root before the terminations are applied. चिनोमि चिनोषि चिनोति 5th Conjugation. चि to collect. Paras. and Atm. चिनुवः or चिन्वः चिनुमा चिन्मः चिनुथः चिनुथ चिनुतः चिन्वन्ति । चिन्वे चिनुषे चिनुते चिनुवहे or चिन्बहे | चिनुमहे or चिन्महे चन्वाथे चिनुध्व चिन्वाते चिन्वते * The letter of a termination is dropped optionally before q and provided it is not preceded by a conjunct consonant, e. g. चिनुवः चिन्वः, चिनुवहे चिन्वहे; but in the form आनुवः of the root आप the उ is never dropped. + In this conjugation the preceded by a conjunct consonant is changed to उ when followed by a termination beginning with a vowel, as अन्ति = आनुवन्ति, शकुवन्ति, &c. आम + ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 9 तनोमि तनोषि तनोति. 8th Conjugation. तन् Paras. and Atm., to stretch. तनुव: or तन्वः तनुमः or तन्मः तनुथः तनुथ तनुतः तन्वन्ति तन्वे तनुवहे or नन्वह तनुमहे or तन्यह तनुषे तन्वाथे तनुध्वे तनुते तन्वाते तन्वते 9. कृ to do, 8th Conj., Paras. and Atm., assumes the form AT, before the strong, and before the weak terminations. Paras. Atm. करोमि कुर्व* कुर्मः कुर्वे कुर्वहे कुर्महे करोषि कुरुथः कुरुथ कुरुषे कुर्वाथे कुर्वाथे कुरुध्ये करोति कुरुतः कुर्वन्ति. कुर्वाते कुर्वते करते . यज्ञेषु सोमं सुन्वते ध्वर्यवः प्रत्यहं प्रातरुत्थायोपवनं च गत्वा पुष्पाण्यवचिनोमि. महात्मनां यशांसि दिक्षु प्रतन्वन्ति कवयः दुःखपीडितामपि मां हृदयमर्मच्छिद्भिर्वचनैः किं पुनटुनोषि. द्वास्थौ पुरुषो राजकुलस्य द्वारमपावृण्वाते. पुण्यकृतः स्वेषां सुचरितानां फलं स्वर्गलोके उन्नुवते. आर्या : संसारसुखानि त्यक्त्वा किमर्थमरण्यवासमङ्गीकुरुथ्वे . श्रुतिमनोहरांश्चित्रालापान शृण्म:: यमहं वरं वृण्वे तं मह्यं दातुमर्हसि. हे जगन्नायक न वयं चर्मचक्षुषा तव विभूतिमुपवीक्षितुं शकुमः. यत्त्वं कुरुषे तदन्यथा विधातुं कः शक्रोति. * In the case of the is necessarily dropped before q and 7.

·10 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. केनापि रक्षसा हुतमस्माकं तुरगं वयं विचिनुमः वारंवारमीश्वरस्याराधनां साधवः कुर्वन्ति. Arena ASICNET ANTON सर्वेषु देशेषु तनोति. The enemies of the king challenge him to fight. You cannot conquer your passions. We make pilgrimages to Kâs'î every year. The chátaka begs water but does not obtain it. Dost thou hear what I say? I do not express the thought, because it is sinful. I shut the gates of the palace. The two instructors expound the principles of Nyâya to their pupils. You only lay bare your own littleness by doing so. Misers hoard money. Prudent people accomplish their own purposes with ease. I saw an animal. It has a thick tail, and shakes it constantly. VOCABULARY II. Roots of the Fifth Conjugation. ** Atm. to get, to enjoy. आप Paras, to obtain. fe Paras. and Átm. to collect; with fa, to search, to seek; with 77, to hoard. & Paras. to give pain to, to tease, to afflict. धु Paras. and Atm. to shake. VE Paras. to challenge, to brare. & Paras. and Atm. to cover, to choose ; with 379 and 3T, to open ; with fo, to expound, to express ; with 79, to shut; with art, to restrain, curb. * Paras. to be able. (2) Paras. to hear. FIY Paras, to accomplish. Paras. and Átm. to extract Soma juice. a Paras. and átm. to cover ; with 71, to spread. fe Paras, to go; with , to send.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 11 fear Roots of the Eighth Conjugation. & Paras. and Atm to do; with que Paras. and Atm. to art, to conquer ; with 377, wound. to betake oneself to, to accept; 7a Paras. and Atm. to stretch; to spread, as a sacrifice, i.e, to with itfa to lay bare, to perform it; with y, to spread. open ; with faca., to despise ; Ra Atm. to mind; with 37%, to with yra, to retaliate, to permit. resist. * Atm. to beg m. 37T90 m. an instructor. 9R16# adv. (pfa every, and 37674 a sacrificial priest, 487 n. day) every day. whose duty it is to prepare | मनोवृत्ति f. and throw the oblations into इन्द्रियवृत्ति. passion. the fire. or groca n. 37279 adly, otherwise. 9 m. a sacrifice. 399 n. eating राजकुन्न n. (राजन and कुल 1. a our adj. a miserly. house, palace) royal palace. quan n. (ata, hide, and q- In the eye), the physical eye. paar f. littleness. at M. a promise, a boon, bridefearg in. (fer diversified, groom. and 31 TT m. conversation) conversation on diverse sub- TTTTCR adv. often. jects. faufa f. power or greatness. SJ13197 m. (Ta n. the unitrefa f. meritorious deed, good verse, a m. the lord) the action. lord of the universe. म्थूल adj. OT, JT3#m. a horse. ग grafia adj. prudent. area n. one's own interest or ata adj. sinful. purpose. 975 adj. (que n. merit, and हृदयमर्मच्छिद् adj. (हृदय ?, the a doer) nieritorious. heart; #47n, the vital parts, sfagata adv. (sfa every, and and g, cutting) piercing gaat m. a year) every year. the vital parts of the heart. विपुल LESSON III. Fifth and Eighth Conjugations. IMPERFECT. The Parasmaipalla terminations are the same as those given for the first class.

·12 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. The Âtmanepada terminations are also the same, but the इ of इताम् and इथाम is replaced by आ (see (1) page 8); and the 3rd pers. plu. is 377. TTT Paras. to obtain. आपनवम् आनुवं आमुम आप्नो आप्नुतम आमुत आनोत् आमुताम् आमुवन् Átm. आनुवि आनुवहि आश्चमहि आश्चथाः आश्रुवाथाम आनुध्वम् आश्चत आश्चवाताम आशुवत 8th. Conj. Paras. अतनवम् अतनुव or अतन्व अतनुम or अतन्म अतनो अतनुतम् अतनुत अतनोत् अतनुताम अतन्वन् Átm. अतन्धि अतनुवहि or अतनुमहि or अतन्वहि अतन्महि अतनुथाः अतन्वाथाम अतनुध्वम् अतनुत अतन्वाताम अतन्वत देवा वे यज्ञमतन्वत तांस्तन्वानानसुरा अभ्यगच्छन्. हे संजय कुरुक्षेत्रे मामकाः पाण्डवाश्च किमकुर्वत तत्कथय. मिलितानां राज्ञां नलमेवावृणुत दमयन्ती. रामादीनानेतुं दूतानयोध्यां प्राहिणोज्जनकः. एकस्मिन्निबिडारण्ये वसन फलमूलादीनामशनेन वृत्तिमकुर्वि. कथय नो याः कथा वृद्धेभ्यस्त्वमशृणोः रमं युद्धे उधृष्णुवन् राक्षसाः उद्यम कुर्वन्नपि फलं नैवानवं तस्माद्भवितव्यतैवात्रोपालभ्या.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 13 ईदृशैः कर्मभिर्महत् पुण्यं वं समचिनुथा. भो भो अध्वर्यवः सोमं यूयमसुनुध्वं नवेति पृच्छति होता. रामलक्ष्मणौ सीतामरण्ये निष्यन्तावासुग्रीवसख्यानुष्ठानात्समी- हितं नैवानुवाताम्. आपतिता आपदः प्रत्यकुर्म भवतां साहाय्येन. Das'aratha performed a sacrifice on the banks of the Sarayû. The ministers of the king sont me to watch the movements of the enemy. We flung open the gates of the fortress. What thou didst still gives pain to thy friends. I could not see him involved in misery. Where did you look for the books which were lost? Bhima and Arjuna challenged Karņa to fight. The two girls gathered* flowers in the garden this morning for themselves. We restrained our indignation with difficulty when we heard that Govinda deceived Vasudeva. Babhruvâbana wounded Arjuna in the breast by an arrow. In the battle, the horses of the warriors were killed, but they obtained others and fought again. Thou and Rama committed a sin for which you both deserve punishment. * The Atmancpada form of the root should be used bére. When a root is both îtmanepadi and Parasmaipadi the forms of the former are used when the l'esult of the action is confined to one's own self, and of the latter when it is lirecteł to another person, 2 sbs ·14 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. VOCABULARY III. अनुष्ठान n. do- 3ffrant (pres. part. of Tray m. anger, indignation. 4th conj. Parus. with 3*) मासक searching मामकीन 31#m. anger, indignation.' THE 6th conj. Paras. and Atm. TEIE m. difficulty, effort. to assemble; fafera assem- 3118aeargra n. (341 up to, bled. सुग्रीव m. proper name, सख्य।. रामादि m. (राम. proper name friendship and and Bilf beginning) Rama and others. ing) up to the forming of friendship with ta. 957 10th conj. Paras. and Átm. 1912 ad. blamable, deserving to deceive. reproach. arga m. proper name. 8th conj. to commit. fauzta m. (fqug f. misery गोविन्द proper name. and dg. involved or swal. 21 f. the wife of Nala. lowed) involved in difficulty Gofm, a fort. or misery. at (past part. of 2) lost. aft f. livelihood, maintenance. fafas adj. without interstices, . ind, an expletive. dense. Quatr m. movements. fargfaqa to watch, to examine 75974 m. proper name. closely; from eq 10th conj. | Falfea adj. n. what is desired. with ft, Paras. pa f. name of a riyer. To adj. groot; fruits, ETTU n. friendship, help. roots, and others. ea adj. killed. amarga . a son of Arjuna the interj. a vocative particle, Oh! Pandara, by a serpent damsel. ta n. a sacrificial pricst, whose ufanda!.. tate, destiny. duty it is to repeat the Mantras. LESSON IV. FIFTH AN EIGHTH CONJUGATIONS—(continuel). Parnsinaipailu. Imperative. In the second class of conjugations ft is the termination of the second person singular of the Imperative. This FE is changed to fu when any consonant except a nasal or semi.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 15 towel, precedes. ff is dropped in the 5th and 8th conjugations, when a conjunct consonant does not precede the of the conjugational sign. आव and आम are to be considered as the terminations of the first person dual and plural, आप्रवानि आप्नवाव आप्वाम आमुहि आनुतम् आमुत आमोतु आनुताम् आप्नुवन्तु Potential. OT is to be prefixed to the terminations of the imperfect. The third person plural termination is युस. चिनुयाम चिनुयाव चिनुयाम चिनुयाः चिनुयातम् चिनुयात चिनुयात् चिनुयाताम् चिनुयुः Atmanepada. Imperative. चिनवे चिनवावह चिनवामहे चिनुष्य चिन्वाथाम् चिनुध्वम् चिनुताम् चिन्वाताम् चिन्वताम् Potential. The terminations are the same as those of the Atmanepada potential of the first class of conjugations. चिन्वीय चिन्वीवहि चिन्वीमहि चिन्वीथाः चिन्वीयाथाम् चिन्दीध्वम् चिन्वीत चिन्वीयाताम् चिन्वीरन् तन् should be similarly conjugated. कृ loses its conjugational उ before the potential terminations beginning with या; कुर्यात्, कुर्याताम, कुर्युः &c.

·16 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. खादिरं यूपं कुर्वीत स्वर्गकामः खादिरेणैव वै यूपेन देवाः स्वर्ग- लोकमजयंस्तथैवैतद्यजमानःखादिरेण यूपेन स्वर्ग लोकं जयति. दुःखसंतापेन पच्यन्त इव मेऽङ्गानि उत्कथ्यत इव हृदयं प्लष्यत इव दृष्टिः ज्वलतीव शरीरं; अत्र यत् प्राप्तकालं तत्करोतु भवान्. वत्स प्रसन्नीस्म ते कथय किं ते प्रियं करवाणि. हे ऋत्विजो ऽद्य सुत्यादिने सोमं सुनुध्वम्. कथं नाम प्रभोरादेशमुलधयितुं शकुयाम्. एतैरालारात्मनः कार्पण्यं मापावृणुष्व. राजन्यनुरागमाविष्कुर्वतां जना यतस्तेषाम् संकटानि नश्येयुः आत्मनः पुत्राणां प्रवृत्त्युपलब्धये दासं श्रीनगरं प्रहिणु. राजन् प्रोतास्मः शुश्रूषया तवैतया तस्मात्सर्वगुणोपेतं पुत्रम- वामुहि. शृणुत रेपौरा:अयं वसन्तसेनाघातकश्चारुदत्तो वधस्तम्भं नीयत तादीदृशं कर्म केपि कुरिन् दण्डमप्येतादृशं प्रामुयुः मृतं शरीरमुत्सृज्य काष्ठलोष्टसमं क्षिती। विमुखा बान्धवा यान्ति धर्मस्तमनुगच्छति ।। तस्माद्धर्म सहायार्थ नित्यं संचिनुयात् शनैः ।। धर्मेण हि सहायेन तमस्तरति दुस्तरम् ।। पूर्वे वयसि तत्कुर्यात् येन वृद्धः सुखं वसेत् ॥ यावज्जीवेन तस्कुर्यात् येनामुत्र सुखं वसेत् ।। Let the servant corer the floor with carpets. L. Brálımanas go about the world and seck Nala. I vvillilo it if he should bid me. De, ??..; llespise your enemics, for they are powerful. * If a short emling in ए, ऐ, ओ or.औ, is followed by a vowel, the य a mi tlie substitutes tur the furiner are optionally dropped. and ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 17 .. Weak men should not, if they are wise, brave strong men. In a Soma sacrifice the priests should extract the juice of the Soma plant. Hear what he says : “Thou art a fool," says he. I wish you would send your sons to England for education. Let us accomplish our purposes as long as he is well-disposed towards us. Do not tease those harmless birds. VOCABULARY IV. saqafca adj. harmless. Byga m. love; good-will. ST73 adv. in the next world. te adj. such. #fam. a sacrificial priest. Cated adj. of this kind. TAIVUy n. meanness. FT81879 adj. (#18 n. wood, 18 n. fm. a lump of earth, and F# like) like wood and a lump of earth. STRO, Fes adj. well-disposed; friendly, pre mn. a carpet. $ 1st. conj. Paras. with ea to boil. खादिर adj.of a tree named खदिर. ITETI m. name of a person. gat adj. difficult to be surmounted, insurmountable. galu m. (5:e pain, and Frog m. heat) heat of pain, 1st conj. Paras. to burn. off. floor. 9991 m. a sacrificer. 99 m. a sacrificial post to which the animal is tied. For 1st conj. Paras. and Atm. to go; with 10th conj. to violate ; transgress. वत्सm. a child; darling; a calf. वधस्तम्भ m. (वध killing, and स्तम्भ post) gallows. वसन्तसेनाघातक m. (वसन्तसेना f. name of a woman and घातक destroyer) murderer of 2*- 9T. fage adj. with the face turned aside. at f. reverence, service. ra n. the day on which Soma juice is drunk in the Soma sacrifice. स्वर्गकाम n. one longing after heaven. FT m. the heaven. sorrow. प्रत्युपलब्धि, (प्रष्टत्ति intelligence, and 59 for getting) getting intelligence. 2 sbs* ·1 ह SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. LESSON V. NINTH CONJUGATION. Present and Imperative. In the ninth conjugation TT is inserted between the root and the terminations. The TT assumes the form af before weak terminations beginning with consonants, and 7 before the weak terminations beginning with vowels. The terminations belonging to the second class of conjugations have been shown in the last three lessons. क्री To buy. Paras. and Atm. Present-Paraas. क्रोणामि क्रीणीवः कीणीमा क्रीणासि कोणीथः क्रीणीथ क्रीणाति क्रीणीत कीणन्ति Átm. क्रीणे क्रीणीवहे क्रीणीमहे क्रीणीषे कीणाथे कोणीध्वे क्रीणीते क्रीणाते कोणते Inperative--Paras. क्रोणानि क्रीणाव क्रीणाम कीणोहि क्रीणीतम् कोणीत कोणानु क्रीणीताम कीणन्तु Atne. कीर्ण क्रीणावह क्रीणामहै कीणीव कोणाथाम कोणीध्वम् कोणीनाम् कोणाताय कोणताम When rout cuds in a consonant the Imperative second person singular Paras is mado up simply by adding rt to the root ; as मुष to steal, मुषाण steal (thou).

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 19 अमितप्तं सुवर्ण विलिनाति. प्रियायै दातुं पुष्पसज प्रथ्नामि. दोहनकाले वत्सं स्तम्भे बध्नन्ति. अस्मिन्नरण्ये मार्ग कर्तुं तरून लुनीहि. अयं तव सदाचारस्ते लक्ष्मी पुष्णातु. युद्धेषु वीराः शत्रूणां शिरोभिभूमिमास्तुणते. उद्धतं गच्छन्त्यास्तव गलितमुत्तरीयं, गृहाणैतत्. विवाहविधौ कन्यायाः पाणिं वरो गृहाति. सुवर्णशतं दत्वा वयमश्वं महाजवं कोणीमहे. अपेक्षितं वृणतां भवन्त इत्यस्मानवदत्कृपालुर्भगवान. रुद्रो देवानवददहं वरं वृणै? वृणीष्वेति ते भाषन्त. पावकस्तोर्थोदकं च पापकृतो पुनीत इति ब्राह्मणा वदन्ति. क्षणध्वंसिनो मनुजा वयमनाद्यनन्तस्य परमेश्वरस्य कथं तत्त्वं "जानीमः. अस्मिन्महति दुर्भिक्षे धान्यं न लभ्यते ततः किमनाम कथंच जीवितं धारयाम. प्रोगाति यः मुचरितः पितरं स पुत्रः यद्गर्तुरेव हितमिच्छनि तत्कलत्रम् । तन्मित्रमापदि सुखे च समक्रिय य- देतत्त्रयं जगति पुण्यकृतो लभन्ते ।। The wind shakes the tops of trees. Do (thou) not steal money ; for the officers of the king punish those who do it (steal money). We eat nothing on fasting-days. 'The Brahmanas now-a-days take prize-money (Dakshini) eren from Yayanas. Purchase (thou) large heaps of corn for me at Bombay. Govinda lops off the branches of the tree. Llet Narayana fill his pot with water at the tank. Thou dost not know their fraudulent schemes. Let them curb their desires, which often carry then astray.

·20 SECOND BOOK OF SANSORIT. I always please everybody coming to my house. I have stayed here for a long time; permit me to go. O Gods ! you purify sinful men when they simply remem. ber soll. VOCABULARY V. Roots of the Ninth Conjugation. अभ Paras. to eat. E Paras. to pound, to reduce al Paras. and Atm. to buy. to atoms. fE Paras. to torture, to give Paras. and Átm. to cook. pain to EF# Paras. to stop. T Paras, to agitate. Ig Paras. and Átm. to purify. gry Paras. to put together. t with fa Paras. to melt. *T* (25) Paras. and Atm. to Paras, and Atm. to cut, lop off. take, with fa to curb. Paras, and Atm. to cover ; JT (ET) Paras. and átm. to with 34T to cover, to spread. knot, with 34*, to permit. | Paras. to become old, to wear 9& Paras. to nourish. out. 91 Paras. and Atm. to love, Paras. and Atm. to shake. please. Paras, to fill. +qiy Paras, to tie, to fasten, Paras. to tear. oft Paras. and átm. to destroy. Parts and Atm. to choose. मुष् Paras, to steal. अमितप्त adj. (अग्नि and तप्त । उपवासदिन n. (उपवास fast, and heated) heated by fire. fa a day) a fasting day. अनाद्यनन्त (अनादि without be- Emai ado. astray. gimning, anıl 37777 without कपटप्रबन्ध 1. (कपट firaud, प्रबeud) Laving neither beginning 78 m. scheme) a fraudulent scheme. 591379 1. an upper garment. 9 n. wife. se adr. (pust part, of a FH m. a pot, a jar. rith n) carelessly or tumul. TOTCT adj. kind. tuously. l'he turulis which sumo routs assumc in the conjugational tenses are enclosed within brackets. + In this conjugation the penultimate nasal of a root is dropped. Tand the following eight roots shorten their ending vowel in the conjugational मन्थ् to churn. nor end. Cusce.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 21 क्षणबसिन् (क्षण n. a moment, राजपुरुष n. an officer of a king, ध्वंसिन perishing) perishing in king's man. a moment. रुद्र m. the god Siva. तोदक (तीर्थ a holy thing, such विवाहविधि m. (विवाह m. marrias a river, and उदक . water) age, and fafa n. ceremony) holy water. ceremony of marriage. दोहनकाल m. (दोहन १. milking, सदाचार M. (सद् good, and आ. काल time) time of milking. चार m. conduct) good con- पापकत् adj. (पाप n. sin, and कृत duct. doer) one who commits sin. सुवर्णशत 2. (सुवर्ण a golden coin, पावक m. fire. शत 2. a hundred) a hundred पुष्यख. (पुष्य and सज f. gar coins of gold. land) a garland of flowers. संप्रति adv. now-a-days. मनुज m. a man. समक्रिय (सम equal, and क्रिया f. महाजव adj. (महत् great, and • doing) doing equally, eren- जव m. speed) rery swift. handed. यवन m. a foreigner, a Maho स्तम्भ m. a post. medan. अक्रीणाम् अक्रोणाः अक्रोणात् LESSON VI. IMPERFECT AND POTENTIAL. Imperfect. Paras. अक्रीणीव अक्रीणीम अक्रीणीतम् अक्रोणीत अक्रणीताम अक्रीणन् Atm. अक्रोणीवहि अक्रोणीमहि अक्रीणाथाम् अक्रोणीध्वम् अकोणाताम् अक्रोणत Potential. Paras, क्रीणीयाव क्रीणीयाम क्रीणीयातम् क्रीणीयात क्रीणीयाताम् क्रीणीयुः अक्रीणि अक्रीणीथाः अक्रीणीत कोणीयाम् क्रीणीयाः कोणीयात् ·22 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. Atm. कोणीय क्रीणीवहि क्रीणीमहि कोणीथाः क्रीणीयाथाम क्रीणीध्वम् क्रीणीत क्रीणीयाताम् क्रीणीरन कार्तिक्येकादश्यां कथयत कान पदार्थानानीत. व तानि वस्त्राणि यानि त्वमक्रीणीथाः रे परिचारक किमर्थमद्य भूमि कटै स्तृणाः ? यज्ञांस्तन्वाना वयं बहून पशून यूपे देवेभ्यो उबधीम. तस्मिन् देशे मया साधं योद्धं बहवो भटा आगतास्तानहमेकांकी शस्त्रास्त्रैरमृदनाम. न कन्यायाः शुल्कं गृहीयादिति शास्त्रप्रतिषेधे सत्यपि केचिदुदरं भरयो ब्राह्मणा गृहन्त्येव. दमयन्त्याःस्वयंवरकाले बहवो राजानो मामियं वृणीत मामियं- वृणीतेति वदन्तः कुण्डिनपुरमागता र प्राविशन. नलं वुवूपर्दम- पन्ती रङ्गागतान नृपान प्रेक्षमाणा नलतुल्याकृतीन पञ्च पुरुषानप श्यंत. ततः संदेहान्नाभ्यजानान्नलं नृपं, तेषां चत्वारो नलरूपधा- रिण इन्द्रादयो देवा इति ज्ञात्वाभाषत, कथं देवान् जानीयां कथं च नलं नृपं बोधेयम्. यदा सा देवान् शरणंगता तदा ते स्वीयानि रूपाण्याविरकुर्वन. पश्चानलं नृपं दमयन्त्यवृणीत. अनन्तरं देवानां कोपं वारयितुं तावुभौ स्तुतिभिस्तानप्रीणीता. ततो देवा नलं वरैरन्वगृह्णन. Having made the mountain Mandara their churning handle, the gods churned the ocean. I sold my books and furniture, but did not get much money. Indra. reduced to atoms his enemy, Vrittra, who was a Brahmana. He thus committed the sin of Brahmana-murder, from which we did not purify him, ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 23 When didst thou put together the sayings of the Rishis ? If you should please the gods by your piety, they would bestow favours on you. Râma and Lakshmana lived in this forest with Sîtâ, and ate roots and fruits. Why did you pluck the flowers from their stems in the garden, notwithstanding* I told you not to do so ? If I took Govinda's books the master would reprove me. Did you not know that the Pandavas resided for one year in the country of Viráţa ? VOCABULARY VI. 37798 n. farour. Gezife m. (73 and 34Tfz beginning, having Indra at the head) Indra and others. eztafc adj. (CET ». stomach, and to fill) one who fills his belly or stomach, selfishly greedy. calfara adj. alonc, solitary. a n. a mat. grozagt n. name of a city. कार्तिक्येकादशी/ (कार्तिकी belonging to the month of Kârtika, and TOTE 817 f. eleventh) the cleventh day of Kartika. Is with 34 to receive in a tricndly manner, to favour. DE 19E87 m. furniture. ait: numer. nom. plu. four. 97T with 34f27, to recognize. fex with ofa & 3471 He with fas 10th to reprove. j. मलतु याकति M. (नल, तुल्य like, and terra form) having the form of Nala. नलरूपधारिन् adj. (नल, रूप ॥. form, and gifta assuming) one who has assumed the form of Nala. 957 numer. nom. and acc. plur. fire. ofreitai n. an attendant. 2T 12. stem of a flower. PERT f. murder of a Brâlimana. afa f. piety. H2 m. a soldier. 9th conj. to reduce to atoms. con with fa and y, 9th conj. to pluck. मन्थनदण्ड m. (मन्थन 2. churn. ing, and Tog, handle) churning handle. OCT m. name of a mountain. मृद * See note*, page 71, First Book, Fourth Edition.

·21 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. } saying 4 n. the place where any great thing is done, stage. रागत adj. come to the stage. 577 12. saf fatta m. name of a king. gag adj. desirous of choosing. 29 m. name of Indra's enemy, ho was thought to be a Brahmaņa. FATH 1. Weapons of all kinds. lasa 1. (ATE 1. scripture, and sfatu m. prohibition) scriptural prohibition. Deti 11. & n. the money given to the parents of a bride, originally as a purchase price. a15 10th conj. to keep off, to stop. Fin. doubt. 818 ind. with (used with the instrumental) स्वयंवरकाल m. खयंवर n. choice of a husband, and it m. time) time of choosing a husband. LESSON VII. SECOND CONJUGATION. In the second conjugation the terminations are directly applied to the roots. Present and Imperative. Most of the roots of this conjugation are irregular; we will proceed to notice the peculiarities of most of these. 1. STFA is the second person singular of the Present of STF, to be. The 37 of this root is dropped before weak terminations ; as स्तः सन्ति. TFE is the second person singular of the Imperative. 2. The of his dropped before a weak termination herinning with a Lurd consonant, and the penultimate 37 Pret '' Legiuning with a vowel ; as TT, afo. TFT is ihe second person singular of the Imperative. 3. The rrots eat and ÉG hare the augment attached to ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 25 नोमि, ог them before terminations beginning with Hand T, except that of the Imperfect second person plural; as, EFETET, thou rulest.' 4. The ending vowel of T?, to lie down,' takes its Gaña substitute before all the personal terminations; as TÌ, ETTÄ &c. In the case of this root T is prefixed to the termination of the third person plural, as शेरते, अशेरत. 5. The ending g of roots takes its Vriddhi substitute, i.e. becomes aft, when followed by a strong termination beginning with a consonant, as I praise, 6. After ET and the augent & is optionally (prefixed to the terminations beginning with a consonant, as Fitfa स्तवीति, EFT: or Entra: 7. After the strong terminations beginning with a consonant have the augment prefixed to them, as TIF *I speak.' 8. The following are five irregular forms of the present tense of a defective root, which mcans 'to speak,' 3TIE 3rd pers. sing.; ITT: 3rd pers. dual; 3717: 3rd pers. pl.; 377ET 2nd pers. sing. ; TTTST: 2nd pers. dual. 9. After 57, 71, TT, TT and the augment S is prefixed to the terminations beginning with any consonant, except य, as रोदिमि, रुदिवः 10. The vowel of TIÆ is changed to before the consonantal weak terminations, as Fato: 11. The termination of the third person plural, as appended to the roots TIÆ, FET, , after and जागृ, loses its T. The Imperative second person singular of TTF is TIF and of चकास्, चकाद्धि or चकाधि. 3 sbs ·26 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 12. The final 371 of CET is dropped before the weak terminations beginning with a vowel and changed to before those with an initial consonant. 13. The et of 2-T is changed to 3 before the weak termi. natious. 14. The penultimate Te of HT takes its Vșiddhi substitute before strong terminations, and optionally before the vowel weak. as 15. The first personal terminations of the Imperative as appended to to give birth to,' are weak. Several phonetic changes take place when the terminations are applied to some of these roots. These wo will notice. * I. immediately followed by T, is changod to T, AFT, third person plural, present tense. II. Tuo ending of a root is changed to, when it is followed by any casonaat, escopt a nasıl or a semi-vowel, or by nothing III. T and T fullowing a soft aspirate or the fourth letter of a class are changed to t. Thus FAT followed by 7, becomes (by Rule lI.) लिद + तस्, and by this rule लिद + , an l'!; second part of the rulu in Nuto, page 24, First B. FE ढस. Thaun, IV, I tried his droppeil, and the preceding vowel, it simri, is mudu long. Thus we have लोढ.. V. Rrits beginning with , and ending with change the ti I nder the sumu ciremunstances as tlose mentioned in Rule 11., OT + TT is T + TT ; by III, it is TET + JF, and by the rule in Note ş, page 23, First Book, it is दुग्धः. • These rule other rules as are stated in general terms should be made applica!»!e w.10.northy admit of it, and not only to the subject of the particu-, lur Lesson in which they occur. -- ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 27 ; VI. द or followed by स् is changed to क; लेद + सि लेक्षिा VII. Then a root has or consists of a syllable beginning with T, T, C, and ending with a soft aspirate. (fourth letter), the is changed to , Tin T, anų the tot, when the syllable is fullowed by F, ET, or nothing. VIII. When a conjanet consonant, the first member of which is For F, is at the end of a word, or followed by any consonant, except a nasal or a semi-vowel, the F or is dropped ; thus in 77 + À, the his dropped, and we have 75 + Â; then is changed to F (Rule VI.), and Ê becomes û by the rule in Note + at page 77, First Book), and the furm is zilou speakest.' IX. A root ending in or 3, short or long, changes the short or long to , and , short or long, to ET, when followed by a weak termin:tion beginning with a vowel ; but the short or long, is changed to T when the preceding base consists of more than one syllable, and the is not preceded by a conjunct consonant; as I + stra=gald, but (TTT+371: = FFTTT:, Int Fift+3774=ffaTaT: Leerption:-The root, tiy, is hy tut before vowel weak terminations, but not beture thuse of the perfect, us + 37- न्ति = यन्नि. X. Ruots ending in IT or 3, and the roots 77, 75T, EST, ØST, TT, TIST, TIST chinge their final to T when followed by any consonantexcept a nasal or a semi-vowel, orly nothing; ST+=+ = : 7.T+=His + fã (1 1, page 26) = 1 + f = 1 + = Tife. XI. The ending of a root is dropped before a termination beginning with ध, as आस् + वे आधेः वस् + ध्वे as वध्व * The student should take care to commit these eleven rules to memory, though they are somewhat difficult; fur, oucu he kuows them, the Sanscrit verle will lose half its dificulty.

·28 SECOND BOOK OF SÅNSERIT: लेमि लेदि लेहानि लीढि लेद Parasmaipada लिह, 'to lick.' Present. लिह्मः व लोढः लीढ लोढः लिहन्ति Imperative. लेहाव लेहाम लोढम् लीढ लोढाम् लिहन्तु दुह, 'to milk.' Present. दुह्मः दुग्धः दुग्धः दुहन्ति दोलि धोक्ष दोग्धि लिरहे लिक्षे लोढे लीदवे Åtmanepada. Present.. लिट्ठहे लिहाथे लिहाने Imperative. लेहावह लिहाथाम लिहाताम् लिहते लिक्ष्य लोढाम लेहामहे लीवम लिहताम Present. दुहे धुक्षे दुग्धे 159) दुहह दुहाथे दुहाते दुमहे धुग्ध्वे दुहते ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 29. गोपः सायं धेनूयॊग्धि पयः. अस्मिन् जगति ये सन्ति कवयस्तेभ्यो नमस्कृत्यैतं यन्थमारभे. पृच्छ बालकाकिं रोदिति. तस्मिन् पुष्पे भ्रमरी मधु लोढः अग्निमीडे पुरोहितं यज्ञस्य देवमृत्विजम्. अश्विनी मनदमपि सौन्दर्ये तिशयाते. योऽस्मान् दोष्ट यं च वयं द्विष्मस्तं घन्विमान्यस्माभिः पठचमा. नानि मन्त्राक्षराणि. हे जगन्नाधाखिलस्यैतस्य वसुजातस्य त्वमीशिषे. हे दीनबन्धो यद्यन्मे नम्रस्य पापं भवेत्तत्तत्प्रतिजहि. त्वां ब्रह्मादयः सर्वे देवाः स्तुवन्धि, ऋषयश्च सर्वे. ईदृशं त्वां शरणमुपैमि, प्रसीद, पाहि मां नरकाद् घोरात्. अस्यां पाठशालायां बालकाः काव्यमधीयते. तरुषु मधुरै रुवन्ति पक्षिणो वायुश्च शीतलो वाति तस्मादम्य- मिदं स्थानमत्रैव वृक्षमूले शिलामध्यासामहै. भो भोः पौराः क्व गतो उस्माकं महाराजः किं ब्रूथ? देव्या सह क्रीडाशैलमध्यास्तइति. एवमस्तु. अहं तत्र गच्छामि सर्व च वृत्तं कथयामि. आचक्ष्व व मामेकाकिनीमत्र विहाय यासि! वत्से समाश्वसिहि समाश्वसिहि. अयमागतस्तव पुत्रको यं त्वं मृतं मन्यसे. गोविन्दः स्मितेनात्मनः कोपमपडते. आस्ते भग आसीनस्योलस्तिष्ठति तिष्ठतः। शेते निपद्यमानस्य *चराति चरतो भगः ॥ या निशा सर्वभूतानां तस्यां जागर्ति संयमीः । य एनं + वेत्ति हन्नारं यश्चेनं मन्यते हतम् । * This is an irregular form for effa; or the 37 of T is lengthened for the metre. + Meaning the soul. 3 sbs* ·30 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. उभी तीन विजानीतो नायं हन्ति न हन्यते ॥ निन्दन्तु नीतिनिपुणा यदि वा स्तुवन्तु लक्ष्मीः समाविशतु गच्छतु वा यथेष्टम् । अद्येव वा मरणमस्तु युगान्तरे वा न्याय्यात्पथः प्रविचलन्ति पदं न धीराः॥ यद्वाचानभ्युदितं येन वागभ्युद्यते । तदेव ब्रह्म त्वं विद्धि नेदं यदिदमुपासते ॥ यच्छोत्रेण न शृणोति येन श्रोत्रमिदं श्रुतम् । तदेव ब्रह्म त्वं विद्धि नेदं यदिदमुपासते.॥ प्राप्य चाप्युत्तमं जन्म लब्ध्वा चेन्द्रियसौष्ठवम् । न वेत्त्यात्महितं यस्तु स भवेदात्मघातकः॥ We do not believe in Govinda's words. You praise worldly men for nothing. What I say is this, Never hate a man simply because his caste is different. These birds sleep or lie down on the banks of the Gomati. He tells me that Govinda is not a man of probity. Child, do not cry; here comes your mother with (having taken) sweetmeat in her hands. These two cows bring forth calves every year. Dost thou not know that Janaka was Râma's father-in-law? Let the Pandavas kill all the wicked Kurus in battle. Do not drive the bee from the flower; let it lick honey. What subject do thou and thy brother study at school? On the top of high mountains we respire with difficulty. While at midnight all men sleep, Hari is awake and reads his books. It seems to me that the people of this place are poor. वद्, वह, वच, यज, वा, स्वप्, and a few others, change their o or to hen followed by the passive य, or any other weak termination. (Sery Rule Lesson XII.) * . or 5 ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 31 VOCABULARY VII. Roots of the Second Conjugation. वर अन् Paras. to breathe. *377 Paras. to be. 21€ Átm. to sit; with ze to sit; with 34 to adore, to worship. Paras. to go; with #TUTA and Eq to submit; with 341 to come; with 377 to know. with a fr, Atm. to study. i Atm. to praise. ** Atm. to rule. e Paras. to tell. 9a Paras. to shine. a Àtm. to speak; with 371 to tell. 78 Paras. to eat. ETZ Paras. to be awake. frgt Paras. to be poor. 5 Paras. and Átm. to milk. fra Paras, and Átm. to hate. न Paras. to praise. at Paras. to protect. Paras. & Atm. to speak. T Paras. to seem, to appear, to shine. 75 Paras. to clean, to sweep. ar Paras. to go. यु Paras. to join. i Paras. to make noise. pę Paras. to weep. for Paras. and Atm. to lick. ax Paras. to wish, to shine. Átm. to dress. al Paras. to blow. traz Paras. to know. शास् Paras. to govern, to regulate, to discipline. at Atm. to sleep; with a to surpass. 7 Paras. to breathe ; with fa to respire ; with fo to believe, to confide; with सम् to calm one-self, to take courage. F Atm. to give birth to. 5 Paras. and itm. to praise. Fr Paras. to bathe. तु Paras. to drop, to ooze. 69 Paras. to sleep. Paras. to kill, with sfa to kill, to destroy. Átm, to conceal, with 270 or with fa. and TT, हन- * The roots अस्, चश् and are used in the Conjugational Tenses only. is used in the Perfect also. + The forms of the present tense of this root are also made up by adding to it the terminations of the Perfect; as a, fac: fag:, &c. (See Lessoa XI.)

·82 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 2 cited; अनभ्युदित adj. (अन् not, अभ्यु- ca adj. humble. fea expressed) not expressed a adj. shining. or made distinct. đã m. hell. अश्विन m. (used in the dual) निपद्यमान pr. pt. of पद् with नि, the twin celestial physicians, lying down. Castor and Pollox. fagy m. midnight. भात्मघातक (आत्मन self, and घा atrafagur adj. (atra f. politics na destroyer) self-destroyer. or prudence; fagot adj. profieftcafea n. (14 self, and fra cient) proficient in politics, or n. benefit) one's own benefit. very prudent. Bata allj. sitting. pr. pt. of myadj. just, right, proper. आस्. gente adj. what is being re- SYTET m. battle. from पठ् 1st conj. इन्द्रिय सौष्ठव . (इन्द्रिय 2. limb or Paras. to recite or read. seuses, and €189 n. beauty," पथः (ablative sing. of पथिन् m. goodness) handsome make. road) from the way. H adj. Pron. both. 97 n. footstep. esh adj. erect, upper. glifea ni. a family priest, a with 7*7 to bow to. chaplain. ata n. a poem. Ha n. the divine cause and essence of the universe. SIETTE M. (ast f. amusement, ब्रह्मादि m. (ब्रह्मन m. and आदि, diversion, m. a mountain) beginning) the god Brahma a pleasure mountain or em. and others. bankment. 23 m. luck, prosperity. Tratf. name of a river. fua ailj. different. att adj. horrible. मधुरम् ade. sweetly. चल with & वि to remove, Hata n. a syllable of a holy more aside. or vedic verse. 98 10th conj. to drive. #FITTG m. lord. ay m. (17 n. universe, gênx adv. according to fancy, gla m. lord) the lord of the to heart's content. universe. gaat n, (g age, period; zftz adj. poor. 3729t another) another age दीनबन्धु . (दोन adj. poor, बन्धु or period. brother) brother of those The adj. pleasant. atat f. dear, a female child. वस्तुजात adj. (वस्तु and जात, a col-1 adj. wicked. 919 lection) every thing that exists. ata 1. anger. 1 m. that are poor:

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT, 33 विभ with सम् }t. probity. and By, to enter in. farra, having abandoned ; abs. from ET, to abandon. विषय n. subject. क्षमूल 2. (एक्ष m. tree, and मूल n. root) the root of a tree. 91 n. what has taken place; an event. यर्थम् adv. for nothing. शीतल adj. cool. सत्यता सत्यशीलता सद (सोद्) 1st conj. Paras. to go; with f, to be gracious or pleased. Fafaat m. a sage who has curbed his passions. संसारिन् m. a worldly man. सर्वभूत n. (सर्व all n. भूत. ture) all creatures. सायम् adv. in the evening. मित n. smile. हन्ट m. killer. crea- श्रोच n. ear. बार m. father-in-law: LESSON VITI. SECOND CONJUGATION-continued. Imperfect and Potential. 1. The root अद्, to eat, has an अ attached to it before the # and T of the imperfect. 2. After the root अस् to be, the terminations स् and त् of the imperfect take the augment š long. 3. After FIT and roots ending in fr the termination of the imperfect third person plural is optionally F# before which the ending vowel is dropped, as अया + उस् = अय् + उस् = अयुस् or अयान. विद्, जागृ, शास, जक्ष, चकास् and दरिद्रा take this termination necessarily, before which the ending vowel takes its Guna substitute ; अविद् + उस् = अविदुः, अजागरुः 4. After रुद्, स्वप, श्वस्, अन्, and जक्ष, the augment or BT is prefixed to the F and T of the imperfect; as 375+ इत् or अत् = अरोदीत् or अरोदत्.

·34 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. I. A consonant at the end of a word is changed to the first or third of its class. Thus in अलेह + त् (Imperfect, third person singular) त् is dropped (by the rule in note *, page 68, First Book), and is changed to which becomes or , and the form is thus अलेट or अलेड्. II. The ending of a root is changed to it before the termination T and optionally before &; 37RTIT, and BTTTTT or अशास्. III. The ending of a root is optionally changed to , or visarga in the Imperfect, second person singular, as syèt: Sing. अदोहम् अधोक अधोक् Parasmaipada. Imperfect Dual. अदुत अदुग्धम् अदुग्धाम् Potential. दुद्याव दुयातम् दुह्यानाम् Plural. अदुह्म अदुग्ध अदुहन् दुह्याम दुह्याः दुह्मात् दुह्याम दुवात दुयुः अदुहि अदुग्धाः अदुग्ध Injit. अहि अदुहाथाम् अदुहाताम् Potential. दुहीवहि दुहीयाथाम दुहीयाताम् अदुह्महि अधुरध्वम् अदुहत दुहीय दुहीथाः दुहीत दुहीमहि दुहीध्वम् दुहीरन ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 35 . Imperfect--Parasmaipada. अलेहम् अलिङ्ग अलिमा अलेट अलीढम् अलोढ अद अलीढाम् अलिहन Atmanepada. अलिंह अलिमहि अलीराः अलिहाथाम अलीकम अलीढ अलिहाताम अलिहत अहरहः स्नात्वा संध्यामुपासीत. दशरथस्य भार्या कौसल्या चैत्रे नवम्यां तियो मध्यान्हे पुत्रं रामं प्रासून पारिक्षितस्य जनमेजयस्य सत्रं सारमेयोऽभ्येत् तत्र च जनमेजयस भ्रातरी तमभ्यहताम. सो रोदीत् ; दंश्च मातृसमीपमयात्. मातापृच्छत् वल कि रोदिवि कस्वामभ्यहन. सोवधीज्जनमेजयस्य सत्रमायं तत्र केपि मामभ्यन्नन्- मातांवदत् किं त्वमकरोः कञ्चित्तेषां हवाष्यवालीढाः? सोभावत नाहं हवाप्यवालिहि. सरमा सत्रभूमिं गबोचैर्वाचाबूत- अयं मे पुत्र को न युध्मानसृशन्नापि हवींष्यवालेट् नक्किमेनम- नपराधिनमभ्याहत. तां न कोऽपि प्रत्यभाषत तेन कुद्धा सा देवशुनी सरमा जन- मेजयं शप्त्वा गृहमयात्. द्रोणाच्छस्त्रविद्यामध्यैयत पाण्डवाः कुशलवौ वाल्मीकेरध्यैयाताम् कर्णश्च परशुरामादध्यैत. यथा पाण्डवा रगे नास्त्रान् हन्युसथा विधीयताम्. स राजा दिग्विजयादारभ्यात्मनः सर्ववृत्तान्तं गन्धर्वकन्याया आचष्ट.

·36 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. try- न --- देववरादन्तपुरं प्रविशन्तं मां रक्षितारो नाविदुः. विदेहान् गच्छन्तो वयमेकरात्रं गङ्गायास्तोरे ऽवसाम तत्र च पूर्वरात्रे नाना रम्याः कथाः कृत्वानन्तरमस्वपिम. ब्रूयात् क्षमी गभीरोऽसीति बत युधिष्ठरं प्रभु को न. कथमहं बली स्यां कथं द्विषो हन्यां कथं वसुधा शिष्यां कथं च मां प्रजा विश्वस्युः कथं च प्रकृतय उपासीरन्नित्येवं चिन्तयतस्तस्य रात्रिरयात्- यस्थ वाङ्मनसो स्यातां सम्यक् प्रणिहिते सदा । तपस्त्यागश्च सत्यं च स वै परमवाप्नुयात् ।। The sons of Dhritarâshtra hated the sons of Pându, and deprived them of all their wealth. The Pandavas then went to a forest. Thither many Brahmaņas followed them. Then said Yudbishthira to them, “You should not follow as, we are now without wealth, and cannot give you food." The Brahmaņas then said, “We are able to earn our own food." Yudhishthira then did not reject them. But he was* unwilling that the Brâhmaņas should work for their own food. He then asked his spiritual adviser what he should do. He advised him to praise the sun. Yudhislıtlıiri then praised the sun, and when the sun was pleased, got from him a cooking utensil, from which they always got as much food as they wanted. We killed many men in the battle. The wives of Sagara give birth to many sons. I did not sleep last night, but was awake. When did you bathe in the waters of the Ganges ? Didst thon milk the cows to-day? -~- * Use a serb liaving the sense of willing with 7.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. I studied Nyâya at Benares. A king should control the wicked and the ill-behaved. If I were in Hastinapura, I should say to Dhritarashtra that it was not proper to deprive the Pândavas of their wealth by dishonest gambling, and if he were not to listen to me I should kill him, VOCABULARY VIII. } BFTE: adv. every day. arm.gift or boon of the gods. 275 1st conj. Paras. to earn. gant f. bitch of the gods. 3719 with 379. to attain. got adj. ill-behaved. with 34f4. to go near. gatal adj. destitute of gran adj. proper. fa77879 s wealth, 09182717 m. à preceptor, a spiri- | Elut m. proper name. tual adviser. qant f ninth day of the fort- *** n. one night. night. ma a particle of interrogation, atat adj. different, many. perhaps. ufffa m. son of Parikshita. & with 3497 or fact to reject gårra m. (ga prior, of the अपार्तम् inf. night) the prior or first part na adj. patient, forbearing. of the night. II with sfa and 341 to reject. gefa f. subject, people. कपट चूत १. (कपट dishonesty or prorfen past pt. of ut with 5 und fraud, and a n. gambling) fut, placed. dishonest gambling. qa ind. particle, implying surm. and on m. sons of Râma. prise, sorrow, &c. 372775 HTT with sfa to answer. गम्भीर मध्याह m. (मध्य middle, and अहन ela m. the first month of the day) midday, noon. जनमेजय n. of the son harj. proper. वाल्मीक of Parikshita, grandson of वाल्मीकि m. name of a sage. Arjuna. fae m. name of a country (in fafa f. a day of the month. the plural). RETT m. giving alms. 77facat f. (E and fat) art दिग्विजय m. (fea f. direction, or knowledge of war. and faut m. conquest) con- श्रम quest of the whole world. a with परिश्रमम to work 4 sbs } adj. deep. Hindû year. name } } to ·38 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. FIT M. name of a king. Fitaa n. the son of Sarama, a 89 n. a sacrificial session. dog. 91 f. name of the bitch of erat f. a cooking pot. हन with अभि; to strike. Twith to deprive one of; to take away. the gods. LESSON IX. THIRD CONJUGATION. ; 1. In this conjugation the vowel, and if there are more than one the first, is reduplicated, together with the initial consonant, if any, before the terminations are applied. 2. (a.) General Rules of Reduplication.— A radical hard aspirate (2nd letter) is changed to the hard unaspirate (1st letter) of its class in the reduplicated syllable; and a radical soft aspirate, to the soft unaspirate. Thus the reduplication of UT is TET; of ft, fauft; of 46, 790%. (6.) A radical guttural is changed to the corresponding palatal (subject to the above rule), and to St; as part from खन्, and जहा from हा. (c.) If a conjunct consonant begins a root, the first mem. ber of it only with the vowel is reduplicated; as from Et we have fort. 6.) E.cerption :-If the first momber be a sibilant and the second : hard letter, the hard letter is reduplicated; as म्पर्क root, पस्पर्ध rd. {"n) A radical long vowel becomes short, and a radical F becornes 37; as tr, fast reil, FTP, Er reel, mr, are red. 3. Irregularities applicable to the thirt conjugation --The vowel of the reduplicated syllable of HT, TT to go, and or T is changed to 5 and that of the reduplicated syllable of fast, FT 57, and fas takes its Guņa substitute. 4. The termination of the third person plural Átm. and l'arus. loses its nasal.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 39 5. The termination of the third person plural of the Imperfect Parasmaipada is GF, before which the final 37 of all roots is dropped, and final इ, उ, and ऋ, short or long, take their Guna substitute. 6. The ending vowel of HT and ET'to go,' is changed to 8, when followed by weak terminations beginning with a consonant, and dropped before those beginning with a vowel. 7. The ई is optionally shortened in the case of हा 'to abandon.' Before Potential terminations beginning with या, the 3TT of this root is dropped, and in the Imperative second person singular it is optionally retained, so that there are three forms, viz, जहाहि, बहिहि, जहीहि. 8. दा and धा lose the ending vowel before the weak terminations : and I assumes the form धत् before स, ध् ñ and T. The Imperative second person singular forms are देहि and धेहि. 9. The penultimate short vowel does not take its Guna substitute before the vowel strong terminations in this conjugation. FFTSTIFT 1st pers. sing. Imperative. Parasmaipada, Present. 1st pers. Sing. Dual. Plural. बिभर्मि बिभूवः बिभृमः 2nd pers. बिभर्षि बिभृथः बिभृथ 3rd. pers. बिभर्ति बिभृतः बिनति Imperfect. 1st pers. अबिभरम् अबिभृव अबिभृम 2nd pers. अबिभः अबिभृतम् अबिभृत 3rd pers. अबिभः अबिभृताम् अबिभरुः ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. .. Imperative. Sing. Dual. Plural. 1st pers. FCUTTIFOT बिभराव बिभराम 2nd pers. बिभृहि. बिभृतम् बिभृत 3rd pers. बिभर्तु बिभृताम् बिभ्रतु Potential. 1st pers. बिभृयाम् बिभृयाव बिभृयाम 2nd pers. बिभृयाः बिभृयानम् बिभृयात 3rd pers. बिभृयात् बिभृयाताम् बिभृयुः Present. मृitm. 3rd Pers. बिभृते “विभ्राते बिभ्रते हु Parasm.. जुहोति जुहुतः जुव्हति भो बिभेति बिभीतः or बिभितः बिभ्यति ही जिव्हेति जिन्हीतः जिहियति मिमोते मिमाते मिमते हा Parasm. जहाति जहोतः or जहितः जहति ददाति दत्तः ददति दत्ते ददाते ददते धा Purasm.-- दधाति धत्तः दधति .itm. धत्ते दधाते दधते 5 Parasm. पिपर्ति पिपू नः पिपुरति पृ Parasm.. पिपर्ति पिपृतः विप्रति. धान्यं मिमीते कुडवेन. अग्नी समिधो जुहोत्यध्वर्युः. यथा मे पिता धर्म न प्रजहातु तथा मे वरं देहि. येभ्यः सर्वे लोका अबिभयुस्तान राक्षसानरण्ये रामोऽहन. भर्ना सह पितृसमीपं गच्छन्ती जि-हेमीत्यवदत् शकुन्तला. * See Rule, Art. 8, page 6. AT Átm. - - ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT, 41 ब्राह्मणो ब्राह्मणो वा यः कोपि निर्धनो शक्तश्च भवेत्तस्मै धनं . राममायाँ जहाहि, जहिहि, जहोहोति त्रिबिभीषणो रावणमु. पादिशत. यस्मिन् कन्यामलङ्कृत्य वरमाहूय तस्मै तां ददति स ब्राह्मो विवाह उत्तमफलका, हरिचरणयोः प्रक्षिप्तोऽयं पुष्पाणामञ्जलिनः कल्याणं विधत्ताम्. व्यासस्तत्र प्रादुरभवद्धृतराष्ट्रं च वनात्पाण्डवानानयेत्युपदिश्य पश्चादन्तरदधात्. पुरोहितास्तेषां गृहं गत्वा प्रथमं पादानवानेनिजुः पश्चात्समन्त्रक कर्म व्यदधुः. यद्ददासि विशिष्टेभ्यो यच्चाइनासि दिने दिने तत्ते वित्तमहं मन्ये शेषं कस्यापि रक्षसि. The sons of Dhritarashtra abandoned the cows and fled from the field of battle. Janaka gave his daughter Sîtâ to Râma, he having bent the bow of S'iva. Brave men do not fear their enemies. I kept my money in that house that the king's men might not take it. Make peace with your powerful enemies, that your whole country may not be destroyed. Art thou not ashamed to go about naked ? The Smritis command the remarriage of widows. Why didst thou shut thy ears when Govinda was telling a story? Women wear ornaments on their persons. One should distinguish self-respect from rudeness. 4 sbs* ·2 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. VOCABULARY IX. Roots of the third Conjugation. T Paras. and Atm. to give. fa Paras. and Atm. to sepa- # Paras. and åtm. to hold ; to rate, to distinguish. put; with fa. to execute, to 31 Paras. to fear. do, to command (as in reliwParas. and Atın. to support, gious works); with 37797. to to bear. disappear ; with off to wear ; #T Átm. to measure. with FR to make ET Átm. to go. with sify or fg to shut; with ET Paras. to abandon. far to place, to keep ; with 347 at Paras. to blush, to be to attend. ashamed. faz Purusand ſtue. to purify ; Paras. to sacrifice. with 379 to wash. peace with; 2759f9 n. the cavity formed by tge adr. or prep. (used wit! joining the hands. rerbs) visible, manifest. अमर्यादशीलता. 1 rudeness ; Fanou m. name of the brothe faqen. vratf.) impudence. of Rivana. 378, 1st conj.ſtm. with 91 (for ATET m. a particular form of mar 971), to flee, to run awar. riage in use among Brahma 345ā unlj. reik, mble. mas उत्तम फलक !j. (उत्तम 11, फन्त TUHF.4. battle-fichel. trut, and a xat) f good truit CTAĦTÅTT. the wife of Râma. ir result. fafarz adj. respectable (persons) 31. a measure ut coru. 214 m. the great author of the en with 347# to adorn. Mahâbhâratn, an epic poem. TE: andre. thrice. शकुन्तला f. the wife of दुष्यन्त. feafqa adr. c'ery day, day by om. & n. remainder, all others. #ra adv. according to the rea pust part of azt, naked. ligious precepts. faunarlj. without wealth, poor. #aer f. small sticks of a sacred पुनरुवाह llo (gat again, and trec, sucli as udumbara, to be e m. marriage) remar thrown into the sacrificial fire. riage. FATHF17 m. self-respect.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 43 LESSON X. SEVENTH CONJUGATION. 1. In this Conjugation, 7 is inserted between the radical yowel and the final consonant before the strong, and T before the weak terminations. The phonetic rules given in Lesson VII. ought to be observed in appending the terminations. 2. The original nasal of the root is dropped. 3. Before the consonantal strong terminations, ने is inserted before the final of TE instead of T. Present. रुन्ध्मः रुणध्मि रुणसि रुणद्धि रुन्धन्ति Imperfect. अरुन्ध्व अरुन्धम अरुणधम् अरुणत अरुणत् अरुन्द्धम् अरुन्द्धाम अरुन्धन Imperative. रुणधाव रुणधाम रुणधानि रुन्द्धि रुणडु रुन्दम् रुद्धाम रुन्द्ध रुन्धन्तु Potential. रुन्ध्याव रुन्ध्याम रुन्ध्याम् रुन्ध्या: रुन्ध्यात रुन्ध्यातम् रुन्ध्याताम् रुन्ध्यात सन्ध्युः ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. Atmanepada Present. रुन्से रुन्द्धे रुन्ध्वहे रुन्धाथे रुन्धाते रुन्थ्महे सन्ध्वे रुन्धते. Imperfect. अरुन्धि अरुन्दाः अरुन्द्ध अरुन्ध्वहि अरुन्धाथाम अरुन्धाताम् अरुन्ध्महि अरुन्ध्वम् अरुन्धत Imperative. रुणधे कृणधावहै रुणधामह रुन्स्व रुन्धाथाम् रुन्ध्वम् रुन्दाम रुन्धाताम् रुन्धताम् Potential. रुन्धीय रुन्धीवहि रुन्धीमहि रुन्धीथाः रुन्धीयाथाम् रुन्धीध्वम् रुन्धीत रुन्धीयाताम. रुन्धीरन दीनाय याचमानाय धनं ददतं मां मा रुन्द्धि पापमेव तस्मादाश्र. येत. कीीरस्य शरीरं चूर्णवदपिनट भीमसेनः. रिपोः करिणां गण्डस्थलान्यभिन्दत वोराः. अद्यप्रभृति त्वां कोशागारे नियुनज्मि तदात्मनो अधिकार प्रम- त्तो भव. तस्यां तवानुरागमस्माकं पुरो व्यर्थ किं व्यनक्षि किं तेन लभेथा- स्तामेव गच्छ. अरण्ये केचित्पशवो ऽन्यान हिंसन्ति अतस्तान हिंसान ब्रुवन्ति.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT.
45
रे पान्थाः जाले निपतितोहं अनागत्य मे पाशांछिन्त.
यत्किञ्चिलभसे तद्भुञ्जीथाः, अन्यस्य कस्यचिद्धनं मा गृध्य.
न हिंस्यात् सर्वाणि भूनानीत्येतं विधिमक्षरशो जैना अनुसरन्ति
स्वगृहे ऽर्थिनमागतं रघुः कियद्वस्विष्य त्वयेत्यन्वयुक्त
रात्रौ नाभुजि मा किञ्चिद्भगक्षयितुं देहि.
कामान दुग्धे विप्रकर्षत्यलक्ष्मीम्
कीर्ति सूते दुष्कृतं या हिनस्ति ।
तां चाप्येतां मातरं मङ्गलानां
धेनुं धीराः सूनृतरं वाचमाहुः॥
I would cut down the tree if Hari should not prevent me.
He pounded those medicinal drugs to give them to his
brother, who is ill.
Dany Brâhmaņas dined every day in the Vis'râma Bâga
with the last Brâhmaņa king Bäji.
A whirlwind destroys trees and houses.
I laid open my griefs to (before) him, and his heart was
melted* with pity.
Let thy honour appoint him to the post of commander of
the forces; he is a brave and skilful man.
Why do you prevent me going to Kâs'i ?
When and where dost thou dine usually ?
We grind our corn with our hands in India ; in England
they grind by means of machines.
Whom shall I appoint to the office of counsellor ?
I now particularise the different kinds of brutes.
Do not destroy all his hopes of prosperity.
• (Sanscrit idiom) was.wet with pity.

·46 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. VOCABULARY X. Roots of the Seventh Conjugation. 35* Paras. to anoint; with fea m. a suppliant. fa to make manifest, or lay 34 f. bad luck ; poverty. open. 31 Taft f. a medicine drug. GF Atm. to kindle. I m. desire. 3 Paras. and Atm. to pound fetea adj. how much, to reduce to powder or dust. attr m. name of a giant. fare Paras. and Atm. to cut. elst conj. Paras. to drav fyer Paras. to grind. out; with for and g to make 453. Paras. to destroy, to worse ; to reduce. break OTRIJIT store-house, treafac Paras. and Atm. to split. sure-house. 9 Paras. to enjoy ; Atm. to 4th conj. Paras. to be dine, to eat. greedy for, to coret. 79. Parus. and átm. to join ; JUGEOT no temples of an ele. with 34 to put a question phant. to; with fa to appoint. para m. whirlwind. T Paras. and Atm. to obstruct; aof m. & n. dust ; powder ; auwith 59 to prevent, to beaa like dust, to dust. siege. m. follower of Jina ; a per. fre Paras. and Atm. to evacu son belonging to the Jaina ate. sect. fare Paris. to distinguish ; with gafata adj. irrational ; brute fa to particularise. gia faciat: gifuig: brute fpe Paras, to kill, to destroy. creatures. OE Paras. to kill, to destroy. दया ta: adv. literally. कृपा 2017 n. a house. eyfa adv. (377 to-day, and gesa adj. wicked deed, wickedgafa from) trum to-day, or henceforward. ar m. net, snare. valt. m. post, power, office. are m. a traveller. STÀUT adv. usually. 84 72 pron, another. 3r] adj. last. Fift n. welfare, prosperity. अप्रमत्त adj. (अ and प्रमत्त care fra adj. sick, ill. less) not careless, careful. atis on. proper name. }f. pity. a adj. poor. ness, sin.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 47 विश्रामबाग m. name of a building to cling to; with 377 to go at Poona. to; to resort to. F# 1st conj, Paras. and Átm. सूनृत adj. agreeable. हिंस adj. carnivorous. LESSON XI. NONCONJUGATIONAL TENSES, The Perfect. 1. General.--The augment is prefixed to those nonconjugational terminations which begin with any consonant except य, before they are applied to certain primitive* roots. Such roots we will call set, and the others anit. The number of the former is far greater than that of the latter; but the latter are more important, and are more generally to be met with in Sanscrit literature. and ऋत्, • i.e. such roots as consist of one syllable only. There are derived roots, such as those of the 10th conjugation (e.g. arte, q99), causals, &c., which are always set. + The following verses separating the set from the anit roots may be learned by heart by the pupil, as easier to be reinem bered than long lists :- ऊ दन्ते!ति रक्ष्णुशीस्वनुक्षुश्विडोनिभिः । दृष्ट भ्यां च विनै काचोज- न्तेषु निहताः स्मृताः ॥i. e. amongst roots ending in a vowel, all consisting of one syllable with the exception of those that end in जत् (i.e. long : and long ), of यु and the others that follow, are cut off from the list of sets; i.e., again, of roots ending in a vowel those that end in and Ft and the others enumerated are set, and all the rest anit. Bis i. e. to fly, Âtm.; 76 i.e. i.e. E Atm. and Parasm. भक पच् मुचि रिच वच् विच सिच् प्रच्छि त्यज् निजिर्भजः । भज्ज भुज् धस्जि मस्जि यज् युज् रज रज्ज् विजिर् खजिन मुज्ज् सृजः। अद्क्षद खिद छिद् तुदि नुदः पद्य भिद् विद्यतिर्विनदु । शद सदो विद्यतिः स्कन्दि हदी क्रुध क्षधि बुधतो। बन्धिर युधि रधी राधि यध् शुधः साधि सिध्यती ॥ मन्य हनाप क्षिप् छुपि तप तिपस्तृप्यति दृप्यती । लिप लप वप शप स्वप् सपि य र लम् गम् नम् यमा रमिः ॥ क्रुशि दैशि दिशो दृश् मश्रिम लिश् विम् स्पृश : कृषिः । त्विष तुष् विष् दुष् पुष्य पिष् विष् शिष् शुष् निष्यतयो घसिः ॥ वसति- Atm. ; हज ·48 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. --- 2. The following are the terminations of the perfect :- Parasmaipada. >> Sing. Dual. Plural. 1st 37 person व म 2nd अथुस् अ 3rd 37 अतुस् उस्. 3. Here there are only three terminations, viz. 97, T, and #, capable of taking the augment. In the case of p, q, I, I, I, I, F, and , they do not take it; while as applied to all other roots, T and T do take ; and eT in the case of roots ending in short te does not admit it, while after anit roots, with a final vowel or having an 37 in them, it takes it optionally. Átmanepada. Sing. Dual. Plural. 1st person वहे महे 2nd से आथे ध्वे 3rd आते 4. The learner will see that these terminations, with the exception of the singular and plural of the third person, are the same as those of the present of the 2nd class of conjugatious. 5. The terminations capable of taking do admit it after all roots except the eight enumerated above. दह दिहिदु हो न मिह राह लिह वहिस्तथा । अनुदाता हलन्तेषु धातवा Eifua ll. in these verses the anit routs are enumerated. For the exigencies of the metre, some roots have an added to them, and the form of the 3rd pers. sing. pres. of some otheis is used. The word 3472179 in the last line is equivalent to anit. The statements made in these verses are true generally in non-conjugational tenses; but in special cases they require modifications. The modifications neces. sary in the case the perfect are noticed abore in the text.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 49 6. A few roots, such as TT, TT, FAU, 479,* Te, fk, अज, स्यन्द, कृप, स्व, सू, धू, गुह, गाह, रथ, नश, तृप, दृप, TT, FAT, 373T, 'to pervade,' &c., which are optionally set in all nonconjugational tenses, are so in the perfect also. 7. Bruse. The initial consonant with the following vowel is reduplicated according to the rules given in Lesson IX. An initial vowel is reduplicated without the following consonant. 8. When the initial vowel undergoes a Guna or Fridhi substitute (see rule below), the reduplicated is changed to TT, and 3 to 5, and when it does not, the two wovels combine and form (long) f, and (long) 5, e.g. Jala 1st pers. sing. of उख, खिव dual, इयेष 1st person singular of 5T, FET dual, &c. 9. The dual and the plural terminations of the Parasmaipada and all Atmanepada ones are weak, and the singulars of the former strong. The penultimate short towel takes its Guna substitute before the latter, and the final vowel and the penultimate BT take Vriddhi optionally in the first, and necessarily in the third person singular. In the 2nd person singular, the ending vowel takcs Guns and the penultimate 3T remains unchanged. 10. Roots ending in Fi preceded by a conjunct consonant, and in (long) F, change the vowel to its Gunn i.c. 375, beforo the weak terminations even, of this tense. 11. Some roots, such as 3T and are defective, and have no forms for the nonconjugational tenses. (See note*, page 31.) 12. In the case of roots ending in TT, tho termination 3 of the singulars of tho 1st and 3rd persons, Parasmaipada, is replaced by it. The final 3T is dropt before the weak terminations beginning with a vowel, and before such as take the augment T. In the case in which this root does not admit of the forms of the 1st pers. dual and plural are over and Aune; i.e. the # is changed to of. The rule is that the final of a root is chauged to a when followed by a or. 5 sbs ·30. SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT, 13. The final ए, ऐ, ओ, and औ, of roots is replaced by 37T before all terminations whatever, except those of the conjugational tenses and the present participle. 14. (a) भू, as reduplicated, assumes the form बभूव. () The ST of FST is changed to T, the off to t, and the a offer to the optionally, in the Perfect, as जिगाय, जिघाय, चिकाय or चिचाय. 15. The penultimate अ of गम्, हन्, जन्, खन्, and घस्, is dropt before the weak terminations. ह becomes घ throughout; and 577 and ETF after the dropping of the 37, become T and respectively : STTTT 3rd person sing., ST- ग्मतु: dual. JET, Pur'asmaipala. Sing. Dual. Plural. 1st person gater बुबुधिव बुधिम 2nd बुबोधिय बुबोध बुबुधतुः बुबुधुः Atmanepala. 1st person बुबुधे बुबुधिवहे बुबुधिमहे 2nd बुबुधिषे बुबुधाथे बुबुधिध्वे बुबुधे बुनुधाते बधिरे " " 1sti निनाय or निनय निन्यिव निनेथ or निनपिथ निन्यथुः निनाय निन्यतुः निन्यिम निन्य निन्युः 18 जज्ञी 2. লাল না or ভারি বস্তু जजी লন: जज्ञिम जज्ञ जजुः . The rule in LA..! VII, about the charge of to should be observed.

·'SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 51 . . गद to speak.' Sing. Dual. Plural. 1st person जगाद or जगद जगदिव जगदिम 2nd जगदिथ जगदथुः जगद 3rd. जगाद जगदतुः जगदुः 16. सृज and दृश substitute र for ऋ, i.e. become स्त्रज and T, when followed by a consonantal strong termination ; सत्रज+थ = सनष्ठ, ददश +थ = दद्रष्ट. These roots admit of optionally in the case of $. For the change of T and IT to , see Lesson VII., rule X. 17. The perfect shows that the action took place at a very remote time, or that it was not witnessed by the speaker. It is generally used to narrate erents of the remote past; and in the first person it shows something done by the speaker of which he was unconscious or which be wants to hide by affirming the opposite. बहु जगद पुरस्तात्तस्य मत्ता किलाहम्. कलिङ्गेष्ववसः ? नाहं कलिशान जगाम. पुरा किल दुष्यनो नाम राजा बभूव. स एकदा मृगयां कर्नु वनमियाय. तं तस्य सैनिका अमात्याश्चानुजग्मुः तस्मि. न कानने दुष्यन्तो बहून मृगान् जघान. एक मृगं पलायमान मनुसरन्मार्गे दिव्याश्रमपदं ददर्श. तस्य सनिकाः पूर्वस्मिन्नेव स्थाने तस्थुः. कण्वस्यायमृघराश्रम इति ज्ञात्वा तं प्रविवेश प्रविश्य च कोनु भोति पप्रच्छ. कण्वस्थ कृतिका दुहिता शकुन्तलाश्रमावहिरागत्य दुष्यन्तं स्वागतं व्याजहार. शकुन्तला चारुसर्वाङ्गों दृष्ट्वा दुष्यन्नतां चकमे. तस्याः पाणिं गान्धर्वेण विधिना राजा जग्राह. अनन्तरं कंचित्कालं तावुभौ तस्मिन्ना ·52 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. श्रमे चिकोडतुः, रममाणं राजानं प्रेक्ष्य सौनकाः पुरं निववृतिरे राजापि पश्चात्स्वं नगरमुपययो. कियद्वसु ब्राह्मणेभ्यो यूयं दद? न वयं तेभ्यः किंचिहदिम. A king named Gadhi, gave his daughter to Richika, the son of Bhrigu. They dwelt in a hermitage and lived happily together. She gave birth to a son, named Jamadagni. Jamadagui married Reņuka. He once got very angry with her for her indiscretion, and commanded her sons to kill her. None did it except his youngest son Paras'urâma. He cut off her head with his axe. Jamadagni was pleased with the act, and said, “O son choose a gift." Paras'urâma begged that his mother might be restored to life again (revive), and be free from her sin. Then said Jamadagni, “So let it be," and Reņukâ rose up alive. Some time after, king Kartavirya came to the hermitage. And he and his soldiers destroyed all the trees, laid waste the ground, and carried off the Rishi's cows. Paras'urâma was not at home. When he came he fought with Kártavírya and killed him. When the sons of Kartavirya heard of this, they were very angry and went to the hermitage. Observing Jamadagni alone, they discharged arrows at him and killed him. When Paras'urama returned home, he was enraged, and resolved on exterminating the Kshatriyas. II asked tho sons of Kârtavirya, “Did you kill my father?" - No; we never killed him," said they. But Parus urâma knew that they were guilty, and killed them and all other Kshatriyas.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 58 VOCABULARY XI. ve 1st conj. Paras. to go. ola 1st conj. with 97% to be gyft adv. and prep. above. restored to life, to revive. #274 m. name of a Rishi. 94 1st conj. Atm. to be embar, 0979 udv. together. rassed, to be ashamed. qua m. name of a Rishi. दिव्याश्रमपद n. (दिव्य celestial, afa 8 adj. youngest. STT 1. hermitage) beau- * 10th* conj. Atm. to love. tiful hermitage. कलिङ्ग 17. name of a country (in Ty 4th conj. Paras. to be the plural). proud. 1st conj. Paras. to run. #177 n. a forest. कार्तवीर्य ñ ar fea adv. never. m. name of a king killed by Paras'urâma. la ind. named, by name. es with a adj. (in the acc.) ind. a particle showing doubt. to lay waste. पलायमान (pres. part. of अय् sfat f. adj. adopted. 1st conj. Atm. to go, with or Y 4th conj. Paras. to be enthe TT being changed to gi) raged. running & 1st conj. Paras. to speak. grata adv. before, in front. JTFE m. name of a king. gå pron. before. Argå m. a particular form of afee adv. out. marriage in which the only ZT m. name of a Rishi. thing essential is the mutual We adv. very, greatly. consent of the bridegroom and a adj. free. bride. 91 f. chase ; hunting, T9 18tt conj. to protect. T 10th conj. Paras. with en a 1st conj. Paras. to eat. to extirpate, to exterminate. fe with fay to resolve. अनय ITT ES f. (FIT beautiful T& 4th conj. Paras. to hurt. pare all limbs) having all Foita adj. 8 and 91a life ; liv. limbs beautiful. ing FAFI m. name of a sage. * The terinination 377 of the 10th conj. is optionally dropped in the nonconjugational tenses, in the case of this root. All other roots of this conjugation preserve the 379 with the final et dropped in all non-conjugational tenses and moods, except the Benedictive, Paras., and Aorist. f BT4 is optionally added to this and the other roots given in Art. 1. page 6, in the non-conjugational tenses and moods. 5 sbs* afrait }m. }m. indiscretion.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. feer 1st and 4th conj. Paras. to accomplish, to be ready. Per 4th conj. Puras, to bear affection to. at with a to rise up. en lst conj. Paras. to flow. Elst conj. Paras. to sound. ह. with 379 to carry off; with 2T, to speak. LESSON XII. PERFECT-continued. 1. When a root has an 37 between two simple consonants and when the radical consonant is not changed in reduplication, the BT is replaced by T and the reduplicated syllable clropped before the treak terminations, and before e7 of the and person singular of the Parasmaipadla when it takes ; तेनतुः, तेनिथ, तेने, &c., lint जगदनुः not गेदतुः 2. The roots तृ, फल, भन्, त्रप, and राथ् when it means * to offend,' change their 37 or 371, to a similarly, and T, भ्रम, त्रस्, फण, राज,धान,भाश, लाश, स्यम्, and स्वन्, do it optionally. 3. Roots beginning with 7 and # and do not undergo this change. 4. The following roots and some others change their , T,, to , 5, , respectively before weak terminations htrally-वच, यज, व, वह, वसा, बद्, उया, वश, व्यच, DE5, 77, 755T, TE, cy, and 674. From this list you, 727, and 155T arc to be removed and cu inserted into it in the case of the Perfect. ..) Defore tlie strong terminations of the Perfect this **197704 tkes place in the reduplicated syllable only. ') पधand स्वप् assume the forms विव्यध and सुष्वप ictire ili sirong, and flat and 995 before the weak, teriminis * This change aves not take place when go and conj, is followed by the Wrak irruinations of the councurional Tenses.

·SECOND LOOK OF SÀNSCRIT. 55 3 (c) Sic is the 2nd person singular, Paras. form of my when it does not admit T, and safe when it does. 6. (a) The modified base of â Paras. J. Átm., to 'weare, before the strong terminations of the Perfect is 374, and a or before the weak; and that of b Paras. sk. Åtm. to cover,' is' faqe before the former and raat before the latter. ib) The base of a Paras. S. Åtm. to call or challenge, is throughout; and of faT, T. (c) and 57 are also conjugated from the unmodified base. Art. 13, Less. XI. should be remembered in the case of the former. 7. अद, ऋ and व्यय, admit of s necessarily before थ. 8. (a) The perfect of roots beginning with any vowel (except 7 or 3T) which is itself long, or being short is followed by a conjunct consonant, is formed by adding 3TH to the root and then appending the forms of the reduplicate perfect of 5, 7, or 37. TETES is an exception. The perfect of roots of the 10th conjugation, causals, desideratives, and other derived roots, or, generally, of roots of more than one syllable, is also formed in this way. This is called the Periphrastic Perfect. (U) When a root is Ātmanepadi, it takes the Åtnianepada forms of , and a Parasmai padi root takes the Parasmaipada forms, 9. («) , 3TT, ATF, and 3118, take tho Periphrastic Perfect necessarily, and Ja, fat, and in optionally. (1) 27, , and also take it optionally, but the base of these is reduplicated, and then 379 and the helping verb appended. 10. (a) If a syllablo of reduplication consists of ST only, the 3T is lengthened. (b) Roots beginning with 37 and ending with a double ·56 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. consonant, and those with an initial F and the root sToT to 'pervade,' insert T after the syllable of reduplication. Ex. अर्द, आनर्द, अन्त, आनन्त, ऋज, आनृजे. 11. The passive of the perfect is formed by making up the forms according to the rules given in these two lessons, and appending the Atmanepada terminations, whether the root is Parasmaipadi or Åtmanepadi in the active.* Parasmaipada. तन्. तातान or ततन तेनिव तेनिम तेनिथ तेनथुः तेन ततान तेनतुः तेनुः Atmanepada. तेने तेनिवहे तेनिमहे तेनिषे तेनाथे तेनिध्ये तेने तेनाते तेनिरे वच Paras. उवाच, उवच अचिव ऊचिम उचिथ, उवक्थ ऊचथुः उवाच ऊचतुः ऊचुः Atm. ऊचे ऊचिवह ऊचिमह ऊचिषे ऊचाथे ऊचिव ऊचे उचाते अचिरे Periphrastic-ritm. far. ईशारुचक्रे ईशाञ्चकृवह ईशाञ्चकृमहे ईशाञ्चकृषे ईशाञ्चक्राथे • ईशाञ्चकृढवे ईशाइचके ईशाञ्चक्राते ईशाञ्चक्रिरे * This is true of all non-conjugational tenses. (See Lesson on the Passive.)

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 57 Paras. कथ्. कथयाञ्चकार कथयाञ्चकृव कथयाञ्चकृम कथयाञ्चकर्थ कथयाञ्चक्रयुः कथयाञ्चक्र कथयाञ्चकार कथयाञ्चक्रतुः कथयाञ्चकः गतायां रात्री सुप्ता वयं किल बहु विलेपिम. युधिष्ठिरेण पृष्टो लोमशी गस्त्यस्य प्रभावं कथयामास. कृतयुगे कालेया इति विश्रुता दानवा वृत्रं समाश्रित्य महीं स्वर्ग लोकं च भृशं पीडयाञ्चक्रुः, नैतत्कर्तुमानढते. तान् हन्तुं सेन्द्रा विबुधा न शेकुः ते ब्रह्माणमुपसंगम्योचुः, भगवन्नखिलं त्रैलोक्यं दानवैरद्यते किमत्र करवामहै. परमेष्ट्युवाच भो देवा दधीचमृषि गत्वा तस्यास्थीनि याचवम; तेषां वनं कृत्वा वृत्रं हत. तथेति प्रतिज्ञाय ते सर्वे दधीचस्याश्रममुपययुः, तमृषि देवाः प्रमुः तस्यास्थीनि च ययाचिरे. ततः स महात्मा त्रैलोक्यस्य हितायात्मनः प्राणानुत्ससर्ज. तस्य परासोरस्थीनि देवा जगृहुः; त्वष्टारं च गत्वा तं तेषामुग्रं वनं कारयामासु ततस्त्वष्टा शक्रमुचैतद गृहीत्वा वृत्रं जाहे. इन्द्रेण सहिता देवा रोदसी आवृत्य तिष्ठन्तं कालेयैरभिरक्षितं च वृत्रमासेदुः. तांश्च युद्धायाजुवुः तैः सह देवानां तुमुलं युद्धं समापेदे. रजोभिः सर्वा दिशो व्या- नशिरे. दानवेभ्यश्च देवा भृशं त्रेसुः. इतसतः प्रधावतां तेषां वेगं देवा दौर्बल्यान्न सेहिरे भीताश्च पलायामासु तादृशांतान दृष्ट्वेन्द्रो विष्णु शरणं वव्राज. ततो विष्णुरात्मनस्तेज इन्द्रे निदधे देवाश्च महर्षयश्चापि तथा विदधिरे.

·58 SECOND BOOK. OF SANSCRIT. ततो रणधुरामेकोपीन्द्र उवाह. स वृत्रस्य वधाय महदनं मुमोच. तेन हतो वृत्रो भूमौ सुष्याप. *ऐन्द्रेण ह वै महाभिषेकेण संवर्त आङ्गिरसो मरुत्तमाविक्षि- ' तमभिषिषेच तस्मादु मरुत्त आविक्षितः समन्तं सर्वत पृथिवीं जयन् परीयायाश्वेन च येध्येनेजे. तदप्येष श्लोको भिगीतो मरुनः परिवेष्टारो मरुत्तस्यावसन गृहे आविक्षि- तस्य कामविश्वे देवाः सभासद इति. When the Kaleyas saw that their leader was killed, they fought desperately, but the gods subdued them at last. They then held a consultation and resolved to destroy the universe. They thought the death or destruction of all Rishis and Brahmaņas to be the best means to that ond; for the universe depended on the religious austerities they went through, and the sacrifices they performed. They, therefore, concealed themselves during the day in the sea. And at night stalked abroad, killed a great many Brâhmanas, and tormented all people. The heritages of Vasishth:, Bhargava, and other Rishis were livil Wiste iu rendered tenantless; afterwards they burnt thein. No men sacrificed, and the gods were afraid. They did not know who did all this, and so went to Vishnu and begged his assistance. l'islımı toll them that the Kåleyas did this at night, and lay wld in the sea during the day. * ऐन्द्रो महाभिषेक: Iras a particular form of coronation according to which Iwira was ontbied hing by the gods. That same form, when used in the case of ruortal kinys, roulured then invulnerable, and enabled tliem to conquer the wlhule earth.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 59 He commanded them to go to Agastya and request him to drink off the sea. The gods went to the sage, bowed to him and praised his might. He asked them the purpose of thcir visit. This they told him; whereupon Agastya went to the sea, and the gods followed him. He drank the sea, and the Kaleyas were drawn out from their place of refuge. Then a battle took place and the gods killed them. VOCABULARY XII. NEJ n. the name of a sage. 91To caus. of a to cause any 37790: adv. at last. thing to be done. di with luth conj. to request. 919 m. name of certain giants. 35 Ist & 10th conj. to afilict, 577 1. the first of the four ages to torment. according to Ilindoo mythology. epfruita past part. of Ir Ist conj. | FT Ist conj. to go, to stalk Paras. with th; sung. abroad. 34 BT. 5th conj. Átm. to pervade, 10th conj. with g to conceal with fa and BTT. any thing; a concealed. 377 n. a bouc. ay 1st conj. Paris. 1th conj. 317fc1 1. a descendant of 341 itu to perform religious pe. रस्. आविक्षिय n. the son of अविक्षित. 14adj. violent, tumultuous. 377979&TT n. a place of refuge. ATTT adj. like that. & 2nd conj. Paras, with a ft to 37 1st & 1th conj. Paras. tu circumambulate. tremble, to be afrail. Bara n. the three worlds. gan: adv. to and fro. a particle. & 1st conj. ſim. to give. I adj. austere, kcen, severc. Tu19 112. the name of a Nixlii. Ey 1st conj. Puras. to burn. y lst conj. ítm. to have com- 975 ailj. belonging to Indra. passion. #f9 m. one whose desires are 3797 m. a demon. fulfilled. *feu f. direction. nance. * Seo nagc 6+, Art. 28.

·60 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. lasten. weakness. head of a king when he is fazia adj. tenantless; uninha crowned), great coronation. bited. FT Ist conj. Paras. with fa to athfgT n. the god Brahma. lament. TTIG adj. dead. Fa with 377. Ist conj. Atm. to परिवेष्ट m. one who distributes depend on. food at the table. STAN M. the name of a Rishi. Tel1577 n. purpose. faqe m. 8 god. He adv. desperately. faza adj. past participle of 9919 m. prowess, greatness. with fa, to beconie famous. UT 1st conj. Paras. to go. faqat: m. plur. the thirty. 1st conj. Paras, to bear fruit. three gods. 336th conj. Paras. to bake. au m. speed, velocity. 313 1st conj. Atm. to shine. fi m. a name of Indra. Tu Ist conj. Atm. to shine. fp with 371 to depend on. IS Ist conj. Atm. to shine. paam. the name of a priest. #971 m. name of a king. FHIFĘ M. a member of an as- 5 adj. fit or destined to be sembly or court. sacrificed. F#a: adv. round about. #OT m, a god. सर्वतः every direction. gra 10th conj. sítm. to hold a 777 adj. the thing to be acconsultation, to consult. complished, end. महाभिषेक (महत् great, and अभि- सृज with उद to abandon. sprinkling water as on the adj. with Indra, prep. in LESSON XIII. Declensional irregularities. The student should remember the terminations given at the head of Lesson XXV. Book First. 1. We will here notice only the anomalous case-forms of several nouns ; the rest are to bo made up by simply adding the case terminations and observing the general Sandhi rules. The rocative singular, except when specified, is to be considered to be like the corresponding. nominative. 2. विश्वपा, शङ्खध्मा, and other nouns whose latter members, or which, in themselves, are roots ending in ST, ) ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 61 1 drop the ending 37T when followed by the vowel terminations beginning with the acc. plural, as far agy: acc. plur. 3. The words art and fast optionally assume the forms ACF and fast before the vowel terminations; FITT, TTĒT or te &c. 4. The yoc. sing., the gen. plur., and the 1st six forms of och are like those of oft, and the abl., gen., and loc. sings. are प.त्युः-त्युः-त्यो. 5. The first five forms of सखि are सखा-यो-य:- 94_#; the acc. plur. is gett, and the abl., gen., and loc. sings., and gen. plur. are her, , HTUT, and Fátart. The voc. sing. is pre 6. 401, out and other masc. nouns ending in form their acc. sing, and plur. by adding and T respectively. 7. 297, ft, 1, and other nouns which are derived from roots without the addition of any termination, and the nouns and Eft change their final for I to 54 or 57 respectively before the vowel terminations. W takes the terminations of 777, while sti, sit, and other feminine nouns of this description take them optionally in the dat., abl., gen. and loc. sing., and gen. plur. The acc. sing. of E* is FH or F#747, and the plural, faft: or f€79: and the roc. sing. is FT. 8. (a) The form of a root-noun, such as is described in the preceding section, is changed to or when it is not preceded by a conjunct consonant, and at the same time when the noun is preceded by a preposition or a substantive, as ग्रामणी:--ण्यो—ण्य:-ण्यम ; प्रधी:-ध्यो- loc. sing. of Truft and other nouns ending in Tt is formed by adding the termination आम्. (6) Exception--gift, and nouns ending in ; as Farui—F#T:, FTüH:, Fidyat, riya: &c. Counter-exception : -वर्षाभू and पुनर्भू, as वर्षाभ्वी &c. 6 sbs ध्यः. The 9.81t:- (c) ·62 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. neces- 9. The word enig is declined as if it were क्रोष्ट sarily in the first five inflexions, and optionally before the vowel terminations beginning with the instr. sing. 10. गो and यो change their final ओ to in the first five inflections ; as shi:, ®TI-1-a: &c. The acc. sings are NT and am, and plurals T: and IT:. The abl, and gen. sing. is Ti: and : All nouns ending in afì are thus declined. 11. and that have no peculiarities. 12. before the consonantal terminations becomes tr as राः, रायो &c. 13. अस्थि, दधि, सक्थि, and अक्षि are to be considered as अस्थन, दधन्, सक्थन् and अक्षन् when followed by the vowel terminations beginning with the instr. sing., and are declined like nouns ending in 37. They are declined like allt in the first two cases. A great many roots become nouns without the addition of any termination. 14. The changes of the final of a root when followed by particular consonants have been explained in Lesson VII.; as Fas fase or fas, FET, FT: &c. FETT, FECH &c., from Farg'one who licks.' 15. The of the roots and root-nouns, 5C, E and FEFG is optionally changed to q i.e. to and 16. Rule VII. given in Lesson VII. holds good in the case of consonantal terminations; as ,,T: &c. GTI, धुग्भ्याम्, instr. &c. from दुह Cone who milks.' 17. Before the vowel terminations beginning with the acc. plur. the ending syllable TiE of certain nouns is changed to go which with the preceding 37 or at becomes aft, as fare: acc. plur. of Fa stale:

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 63 18. The # of TTTHIE is changed to T before the consonantal terminations. 19. The first five inflected forms of STAGE are stical- न् -हा, हम . The voc. sing. is 9776T. The final is changed to when followed by the consonanta) terminations. 20. The nom. sing. of Faq is cît:. It becomes ? before the consonantal terminations, as द्युभ्याम. 21. Nouns ending in the syllable TT, such as TETET and अर्यमन् and पूषन्, differ from other nouns ending in 977, in lengthening the penultimate 3T, in the nom. sing. only. The न् of वृत्रहन् is changed to ण् when tis not dropped; as वृत्र. T-goi-go &c. About the change of to T when the 3T is dropped, see Rule I. page 26. 22. श्वन्, युवन् and मघवन् change their a to उ when followed by the vowel terminations beginning with the acc. plur., as 77, Lai, Hit: acc. plur. &c. In other respects they follow the general declension of nouns ending in 377. 23. अर्वन is declined like nouns ending in वत् except in the nom. and voc. sing. When the negative particle et is prefixed, it is declined like SITT. 24. The first five forms of पथिन् are पन्था-:-नी- ना-नम्-नौ. The final इन् is dropped before the vowel terminations. In other respects it follows the general declension of nouns ending in T.. declined similarly. The nom. sing. of the latter is FLOT:. 26. For the change of the final consonant of TTT, T (+966) far, falat, &c. see X. Lesson VII. The hard consonant that represents T is and the soft . The 3T of परिव्राज is similarly changed to ८ or इ. Ex. राट् or राड्, राजी &c. विश्वसृट-ड-विश्वसृजी &c. 25. मथिन् and ऋभुक्षिन् are ·64 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. as 27. प्राच, प्रत्यच, उदच, अवाच, सम्यच and तिर्यच have a nasal inserted before the final consonant in the first five inflections of the masc. The nom. sings. are प्राङ्, प्रत्यङ, उदङ, &c. Before the vowel terminations beginning with the acc. plur. प्रत्य, उद, सम्य and तिर्य become प्रती, उदी, समी and तिरश, प्रतीचः, उदीचः, समीचः, and तिरश्चः acc. plurs. The feminine forms of these are made up by adding t to the crude thus modified ; प्राची, प्रतीची &c. 28. स्त्रज, तादृश, दिश् and दृश् change the final to क् or T when followed by hard or soft consonants. 29. Present participles of the 3rd conjugation differ from those of other conjugations in not inserting 7 before the final in the first five inflections of the masc. In the nom. and acc. plur. of the neuter they insert - optionally. 30. दोषन् . असन् ४. दत् m. पद् m. नस् F. मास् M. हृद् ४. निश.. मांस् ॥. पृत f. स्नु m. शकन् . उदन् n. आसन् ". have no forms for the and the sing. and dual of nom., the acc. In other cases they are declined according to the general rules. The ET of FTA and Hier is dropped before the consonantal terminations. 31. The first five forins of IF are पुमान्-मांसी- मांसः--मांसम्-मांसौ. The voc. sing. is पुमन. The ending is dropped before the consonantal terminations. 2. उशनस् differs from other nouns ending in अस् (as चन्द्रमस्) in the nom. sing. which is उशना, and the voc. sing. which is optionally उशनन्, उशन, or उशन:. B. गिर and other nouns ending in र such as पुर धुर &c. and STIFTA lengthen the penultimate when followed by a consonantal termination. The # of the last becomes प under the usual circumstances. Ex. गीः, गिरी, गिरः &c.

·, SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 65 34. PTT is declined in the plural only. The nom. is STTT:. Its T is changed to before the terminations with an initial म. 35. The final of 37€T is changed to ? before the nom. sing. and to visarga before the other censonantal terminations., 36. पूर्व, पर, अवर, दक्षिण, उत्तर, अपर, अधर, and स्व when they indicate mere relation (in space, time or person), and 37 when it means "external,' or a piece of cloth,' are declined like pronouns. They are optionally so declined in the nom. plur. and abl. and loc. sing. Ex. पूर्वे or पूर्वाः, पूर्वात पूर्वस्मात्, पूर्वे or पूर्वस्मिन्- 37. The following nine words, which are pronouns, and are declined as such, form the sing. of the nom. and acc. neuter by adding t or दः,-अन्य, अन्यतर, कतर, कतम, यतर यतय, ततर, नतम, इतर; as अन्य-त or द्, कतर-त् or द. or यदा महान् वैयाकरणः पाणिनिः समजायत तदा व्याकरण- विषये प्राचां कानिचिन्मतानि प्रतीचां मतेभ्यो भिन्नान्यासन्. पूर्वेषां संप्रदायमनुसृत्य ग्रन्थारम्भे देवतां स्तौमि. विधवायाः पुनरुद्वाहः सशास्त्र इत्येके,* शास्त्रविरुद्ध इत्यन्ये, कलो प्रतिषिद्ध इत्यपरे वदन्ति. विवाहविधावर्यमणं पूषगं चाधिकृत्य मन्त्रान् पठन्ति. अपराधं विना पत्युनारी तस्मै प्रकुप्यति प्रजापोडनजो वन्ही राज्ञः श्रियं कुलं प्राणांश्च दहति. यस्मिन् शकटे सोमो राजा नीयते तस्य धुरि अन्यतरोऽनड्वा. न्युक्तः स्यादन्यतरो विमुक्तोऽथ राजानमुपाहरेयुः. यूनां बुद्धिः शास्त्रैः संस्क्रियते. पत्या परित्यक्ता विधवा वा यान्यं पति विन्दते सा पुनर्भूर्भवति. दिवि यथा संख्यातीतास्तारकास्तथैव दाशरथी रामे गुणा * See page 72, Art 4. + The sacred plant Soma is often spokea of as 779T, or king. 6 sbs* -- ·86 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. तस्याश्चार्वाः स्त्रिया लावण्यं पश्यन्तो जना अक्ष्णां फलं प्रापुः इन्द्रियं वा एतदस्मिन् लोके यहधि यहधाभिषिञ्चति इन्द्रिय- मेवास्मिंस्तहधाति. मधुराभिर्गीभिः साधु सान्त्वयामास गोविन्दः स साधुश्च तमा- शोभिरनुगृह्यष्टं प्रदेशं जगाम. अना रक्षः संसृजतात. एकः शब्दः सम्यग् ज्ञातः सम्यक्प्रयुक्तश्च स्वर्गे लोके कामधुग भवतीति वैयाकरणानां मतम् पुण्येऽहनि पुरोधास्तं राज्येऽभिषिषेच, मन्त्रं चेमं पपाट. "याभिरिन्द्रमभ्यषिश्चत्प्रजापतिः सोमं राजानं वरुणं यमं मनुं ताभिरद्भिरभिषिञ्चामि त्वामहं राज्ञां त्वमधिराजो भवेह" देवासुरा वा एषु लोकेबु संयेतिरे. त एतस्यां प्राच्यां दिशि येतिरे तांस्ततो ऽसुरा अजयंस्ते दक्षिणस्यां दिशि येतिरे तांस्ततो सुरा अजयंस्ते प्रतीच्यां दिशि येतिरे तांस्ततो उमुरा अजयंस्त उदीच्यां दिशि येतिरे तांस्ततो ऽसुरा अजयन. 7 आदित्यचन्द्रावनिलोऽनलश्च द्यौमिरापो हृदयं यमश्च । अहश्च रात्रिश्च उभे च सन्ध्ये धर्मोप जानाति नरस्य वृत्तम् ।। यथाभिषं जले मत्स्यैर्मक्ष्यते श्वापदैर्भुवि । आकाशे पक्षिभिश्चैव तथा सर्वत्र वित्तवान् ।। नक्रः स्वस्थानमासाद्य गजेन्द्रमपि कर्षति । स एव प्रच्युतः स्थानाच्छुनापि परिभूयते ॥ बुद्धिमान् पुरुषो जह्याद्भिन्नां नावमिवाम्भसि । अववक्तारमाचार्यमनधीयानमृस्विजम् ।। * This refers to the person who is sprinkled over with water, or curdled milk. + When tlic victim is killed at a sacrifice its blood is given away to evil spirits.

·१ SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRİT. 67 जाडचं धियो हरति सिञ्चति वाचि सत्यं मानोन्नति दिशति पापमपाकरोति । चेतः प्रसादयति दिक्षु तनोति कीर्ति सत्सङ्गतिः कथय किं न करोति पुंसाम् ।। मानुषाणां* प्रमाणं स्याद्भुक्तिर्वै दशवार्षिकी । विहङ्गानां तिरश्चां च यावदेव समाश्रयः ।। कृष्णसारे ददचक्षुस्त्वयि चाधिज्यकार्मुके । मृगानुसारिणं साक्षात्यश्यामीव पिनाकिनम् ॥ When Bharata was crowned, he gave cows to Bráhmaņas by hundreds. Dîrghatamas saw him giving them. In former times, Brâhmaņas used (ate) cows' flesh and goats' flesh. The Northern people regarded slavery as inhuman, and fought with the Southern to root it out. Us'anas was the preceptor of the Asuras and Bțihaspati of the Devas. There exist works on politics of which they are the reputed authors. They began to excavate the hill, and effected it after many days. The headman of the village was asked by the commander whether he would give grain to his army. The hut near Chitrakåta was built by the recluses that dwelt in the vicinity. Women shall bring up (take care of) children, and men shall acquire money by hard labour. Dilipa's horse was once taken away by Indra. In the beginning there were waters only. On these waters appeared the self-existent Brahmâ, and by that selfexistent being all these things were created. * This sets forth the period of possession or enjoyment necessary to constitute ownership. † Said to King Dushyanta by his charioteer when he was pursuing an antelope.

·68 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. Idols are made of the bones of elephants. He who walks by the path of truth attaios prosperity. In Greece there were two hills which were called “dog's heads." Thou art commanded by thy husband to give money to the poor. His companion having gone to Kàs'î, he lives here alone. The name of Aryaman occurs in Zend religious books. VOCABULARY XIII. to. 377 n. an eye. 5*78 m. name of the preceptor BYET adj. pron. lower, low. of the douras. 37797 m. an ox. Fyra m. a name of Indra. 379 m. fire. garam. & n. the head, the skull. afa n. wind. 9TH SEm.one fulfilling any wish. 39 f. water (used in the plural). n. a bow; with apfa adj. 274+ pron. other, another. one who has his bow strung. 27fuga adj. reputed. gen. a family. HIT m. deity; one of the er with and 377 to remove, dead forefathers. with अघि to aim at, अधिकृत्य 3480 m. a horse. having aimed at, i.e. referring 397 adj. pron. hinder, posterior, inferior. SUUTETT m. an antelope. 91 adj. southern. Twith = 1st conj. Paras. 8787 n. blood. and Átm. to excavate. Tony m. a sweeper, a cleaner. 3797 n. a day. for f. a speech. BITFT m. n. flesh, bait. ITT m. a bull, f. a cow, speech, fwef.a blessing. the earth. 3787 n. mouth. graurt m. leader of a village. fiza n. vigour (of limbs). et m. the moon. # pron. over, upper, after, rg f. a beautiful woman ; a subsequent. belle. ere adj. northern. ag n. heart, intellect. BET n. water. 99 with 74 to be born, to gafa f. loftiness, magnanimity. flourish. 37657 n. blood.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 69 manner. ness. 7 m. a tooth. #adj. like that; in that faalfarar m. a name of S'iva. J7 m. a man. fagio m. a lower animal ; adj. gari m. a widow remarried. horizontal, sideways. Sf. a town. तुरासाह Indra. geteg m. a family priest. far f. light, splendour, bright- gå adj. pron. former, eastern. ga f. army. ya past. part, of to fall, a pres. part. of T, to give. with 7. feu adj. pron. southern. 7919375 adj. (981 f. subjects fan. curdled milk. 4737 n. oppression, and दाशरथि m. son of दशरथ. from 37 arising), arising from Te n. slavery. the oppression of the subfra f. a day, heaven. jects. feu f. direction. gfarosa adj. forbidden, prohi- ET f. sight, an eye. bited. gas adj. worshipper of gods. 27 adj. western. tarot m. an arm. at adj. keen or acute, talented. auf. heaven nga adj. used. wage n. a religious book. 917 adj. eastern. ut with affer to call, to speak, faf possession, enjoyment.' to name; 37fafea past. part. f. the earth. eft f. intellect. with qfc to despise, to treat f. yoke. contemptuously 7 m. a crocodile. f. an eyebrow. 7. f. nose. 7897 m. a name of Indra. fait m. a god. afya m. a churning stick. fax f. night. ogfos m. a black bee. faca adj. wicked. #1 with fat 3rd conj. Atm. to 97 1st conj. Paras. to repeat, to produce, to build read. ufa m. master, husband. HIT N. afert m. a path, a way. AT7 m. a month. 97 m. foot. #gata adj. inhuman. 997 m. the sun, a protector. #tarafa f. (#ta respect,) loftiqt adj. pron. another, other. ness of respect, great self- परित्यक्त past. part. of त्यज् with respect. ofc, abandoned. i with 10th conj. to root of m. a recluse. out. मांस 2.0 } flesh.

·70 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT." got m. a way. ous. मृगानुसारिन् adj. following or Max: adv. by hundreds. pursuing an antelope. if. wealth, goddess of wealth. यत् with सम् to struggle. * m. a dog. 9196 m. a beast of prey, a beast. 377 n. a young man. #fam. a friend, a companion. 775 m. a king; adj. shining. Perata adj. (Felf. number, m. wealth. stata adj. gone beyond) in. Tad n. beauty, loveliness. numerable. a. with a m. an evil-speaker, gafa f. company of the virtuone who speaks improper things. 5 with 34T 1st conj, Paras. to वन्हि m. fire. approach, to come to. TÅTH m. a frog. with (in the causal) to fapaa adj. wealthy. please, to propitiate. विश् m. a man of the mercantile The adj. good. caste; f. subjects, people. #ETST m. a great king, an emfaagt m. the protector of all, peror. God. BYETU m. custom. fanare the protector or sup- ana m. f. self-existent. porter of the universe. tenta adv. in the presence of, in for the creator, Brahmâ. Cara m. killer of Qat; Indra. TatuT m. a grammarian. with 77, to bring in contact with, to unite with. TATU n. grammar. f. a woman, wife. aie m. n. a cart. with eq and 34T 1st conj. Pa- 29977 n. animal-dung, ras. and átm. to bring, to take. m. a shell-blower. m. summit. sight of. HT LESSON XIV. 1. The following is a list of the Sanscrit cardinal numerals : १ एक One ६ षष् Six २द्वि Two सप्तन् Seven Three ८ अष्टन् Eight Four ९ नवन् Nine ५पञ्चन् Five १० दशन् Ten ४ चतुर ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 71 १७ सप्तदशन् (नवदशन् . Nineteen ११ एकादशन् Eleven १६ षोडशन् Sixteen १२ द्वादशन Twelve Seventeen १३ त्रयोदशन् Thirteen १८ अष्टादशन् Fighteen १४ चतुर्दशन Fourteen १५ पञ्चदशन् Fifteen एकोनविंशति) २०विशति Twenty Up to TTTTT these numerals may be considered as adjectives, i. e. they take the number and case of the noun to which they are applied. 2. विंशति Twenty षष्टि Sixty त्रिंशत् Thirty सप्तति Seventy चत्वारिंशत् Forty अशीति Eighty पञ्चाशत् Fifty नवति Ninety These may be considered as substantives. They are all feminine; the noun to which they are applied may be of any gender. With a plural noun they are used in the singular. They have duals and plurals like other nouns, but when these are used the construction is different. As विशतिब्राह्मणाः twenty Brahmanas, ब्राह्मणानां विंशती two twenties of Brahmanas ; ब्राह्मणानां विंशतयः many tventies of Brâhmaņas. The singular may be used similarly; as ब्राह्मणानां विंशतिः one twenty of Brahmanas. , 3. The numbers intermediate between any two of these are formed by prefixing एक, द्वि &c., up to नवन to the lower; but the ninth intermediate number is generally made up by prefixing it to the higher. In making these compounds the final 7 is invariably dropped; Fa becomes द्वा, त्रि, त्रयः and अष्टन्, अष्टा. But the three latter changes are optional in the case of चत्वारिंशत्, पञ्चाशत्, षष्टि, सप्त- ति, and नवति; and do not take place at all in the case of ·72 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. fat. These numerals also follow the constructions explained in the preceding paragraph. TT, a hundred, is a neuter noun. DECLENSION. Masculine. 5 is declined like a pronoun; as an indefinite pro noun in the sense of the English one in " the great ones of this country," it has the dual and the plural. fe has the dual only, and in declining it is to be considered as , i.e. a noun ending in 3T; @ Nom. and Acc., 1 Instr., Dat., and Abl., 41: Gen, and Loc. Ft and the other adjectival numerals are declined in the plural only. FT fol. lows the general declension of masculine nouns ending in . The genitive only is peculiar; it is TUTTIH. The nom. of चतुर, is GETIT: and the Gen. and Loc. चतुर्णाम् and चतुष. The rest are regular. After the other adjectival numerals the nom. and acc. terminations are dropped, and the final T is eliminated here as before the consonantal terminations; as 952 nom. and acc., पञ्चभिः instr., पञ्चभ्यः dat. and abl., पञ्चसु loc.; E or C nom. and acc., Tcfy: instr., 72: dat. and abl., षट् loc. The genitives are पञ्चानाम् and षण्णाम्. fa, some, is similarly declined. अष्टन् is also declined in another way; at nom, and acc., 3721f77: instr., 3791227: dat. and abl. अष्टासु loc. There is no difference in the genitive. Feminine. 5. rar and are declined like gaf. The feminine forms of FE and age are चतसृ, which declined; Fara: and 27: nom. and acc., faæfit: and तिसृ and are thus ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 73 चतसृभिः instr., तिसृभ्यः and चतसृभ्यः dat. and abl., तिसृ- णाम and चतसृणाम् gen., and तिसृषु and चतसृषु loc. The feminine forms of other adjectival numerals are not different from the masculine. Neuter. द्वे 6. एक. एकम Nom. and Acc. द्वि त्रि त्रीणि चतुर चत्वारि The neuter forms of other adjectival numerals are similar to the masculine. 7. The ordinals corresponding to एक, द्वि, त्रि, चतुर्, and षष्, are प्रथम, द्वितीय, तृतीय, चतुर्थ, and षष्ट. Instead of प्रथम, अग्रिम, and आदिम, and of चतुर्थ, तुर्य and तुरीय are also used. From the other cardinal numerals up to दशन् inclusive, they are formed by dropping the final r and adding म, as पञ्चम: &c.; and after दशन् up to नवदशन् by simply dropping न, as एकादश : &c. 8. The ordinals from fazta and the other substantival numerals, and from their compounds, are formed by adding as विंशतितमः, एकविंशतितमः, त्रिंशत्तमः, एकत्रिंशत्तमः &c. Another way is by dropping the fa of Färta, and the final consonant of the rest. Where there is a final vowel, that vowel is changed to 3T, but only in compound numerals, the simple ones forming their ordinals in the first way, as विंशः, एकविंशः, त्रिंशः, एकत्रिंशः, षष्टितमः, एकषष्टः, एकष- ष्टितमः &c. 9. The feminines of प्रथम, अग्रिम, आदिम, द्वितीय, तृतीय, तुर्य, and तुरीय, are formed by adding आ, and of the rest by changing the final अ to ई. as प्रथमा, द्वितीया, &c., and चतु- थी, पञ्चमी, एकविंशी, एकविंशतितमी, &c. 7 sbs ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 10. The nom. plur. of प्रथम n. is प्रथमे or प्रथमाः, and the abl. gen. and loc. sing. of fornita and aater or faster and atat are optionally like those of pronouns ending in a Or आ. 11. Adverbs of definite frequency are formed from numerals by the addition of स् to द्वि, त्रि, and चतुर, and कृत्व. स् to the rest, before which the final l is dropped. For एक we hare सकृत. once. Ex. Fa: twice, fe: thrice, at: four times, पञ्चकृत्वः, षट्कृत्व: &c. 12. The termination वत् is applied to यत्, तद्, and एतद्, and यत् to इदम् and किम्, in the sense of "as much as." 'The three former become या,ता, and एता, and the two latter B and कि, as तावत, "that much," तावान् nom. sing. पञ्चाशते ब्राह्मणेभ्यः प्रत्यहं कृष्णवर्मान्नं ददाति. गुरोः परिचर्या कुर्वतस्तस्य द्विचत्वारिंशदहानि व्यतीयुः. चनस्रो विद्याश्चतुप्पष्टिं कलाश्च चन्द्रापीडो शिक्षत. चत्वारि *शृङ्गा त्रयो ऽस्य पादा द्वे शीर्षे सप्त हस्तासो ऽस्य.. श्रावणस्य कृष्णपक्षे अष्टम्यां तिथी देवको कृष्णं सुषाव. त्रिः सप्तकृत्वः परशुरामः पृथिवीमक्षत्रियामकरोत. मप्तदश सामिधेनीग्नुयात्. ना एताः सप्त! वाह. तासां त्रिः प्रथमामन्वाह विरु त्तमांना एकादश संपद्यन्ते. गर्भाप्टमे अब्दे कुर्वीत ब्राह्मणस्योपनायनं, गर्भादेकादशे राज्ञो गर्भानु द्वादशे विशः पटक - Non. Til of 1. Id.. Vol. pl. of हस्त Talit. : This is propeaterl when the sacredl fire is kindled. It contains a description ithe imagin' shape of the fire.god. · The nominative of this is wrat, understood. This refers to the repeating of verses ly the lotil it a certain curt'lliony:

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 75 % 3B सप्त च त्रयस्त्रिंशद्वै देवा अष्टौ वसव एकादश रुद्रा द्वादशादित्याः प्रजापतिश्च वषट्कारश्च. * शतमनूच्यमायुष्कामस्या; शतायुर्वै पुरुष आयुष्येवेनं तहधाति . त्रीणि च शतानि च षष्टिश्चानूच्यानि यज्ञका-' मस्य; त्रीणि च वै शतानि षष्टिश्च संवत्सरस्याहानि, तावान् संवत्सरः, संवत्सरः प्रजापतिः, प्रजापतिर्यज्ञ; उपनं यज्ञो नमति यस्यैवं विद्वांस्त्रीणि च शतानि च षष्टिं चान्वाह. शतानि विंशनिश्चानूच्यानि प्रजापशुकामस्य, सप्त च वै शतानि विंशतिश्च संवत्सरस्याहोरात्राः त्रिराचमेदपःपूर्व द्विः प्रमृज्यात्ततोमुखम् । खानि चैव स्पृशेदद्भिरात्मानं शिर एव च ॥ जीवन्तोपि मृताः : पञ्च व्यासेन परिकीर्तिताः। दरिद्रो व्याधितो मूर्खः प्रवासी नित्यसेवकः ।। अनारभ्भो हि कार्याणां प्रथमं बुद्धिलक्षणम् । प्रारब्धस्यान्तगमनं द्वितीयं बुद्धिलक्षणम् ॥ नष्टे मृते प्रवजिते क्लीबे च पतिते पतौ । पञ्चस्वापत्सु नारीणां पतिरन्यो विधीयते ॥ तिस्त्रः कोटयो उर्धकोटी च यानि लोमानि मानवे । तावत्कालं वसेत् स्वर्ग भर्तारं यानुगच्छति ॥ On the 27th day of the month a conclave of Panditas was held. . * At the ceremony called प्रातरनुवाक, which forms & part of the Agnishtoma sacrifice, a great many verses are repeated by the priests. The number of these is determined in this passage. For instance, first, he says, 'at the sacrifice instituted by one who desires a long life, one hundred verses should be repeated.' Then follows a reason for this; and so on. + This qualifies FGTAN or sacrificer, understood. * This refers to the यजमान. $ The nominative of this is the priest होता, understood. il This is a deviation from Pânini. See last Icsson, Art. 4.

·76 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT.' At that time ninety-nine men were examined, of whom fifty-four passed. The Panditas say that there are eighteen Purâņas and twenty-four Smritis. Originally there were three Vedas, Rich, Yajush, and Saman; afterwards there came to be four. There are now two principal branches or S'âkhâs of Yajurveda. The Smriti of Manu is in twelve chapters, and in the seventh the duties of kings are enumerated. On the tenth of the bright half of Âs vina, people in the Deccan give to each other leaves of S'amî tree, calling them gold. All enemics were killed by the five Pandavas. Rama cut off the ten heads of Râvaņa. He gained proficiency in the four learnings (lores), six S'âstras, and sixty-four arts. I told him to depart three times, and when he did not do gave him a kick. The Hindus believe that there are eight guardians of eight different directions. Of the eighteen Parras of Mahâbhârata, the third is the best, because it contains many pleasant stories. The doctor has directed me to take this medicine for * forty-two days. I have studied seventeen chapters of Raghu, seven of Kunâra Sambhava, nine dramatic plays, and eighty-six pages of Patanjali's Maha Bhashya. So, I VOCABULARY XIV. अक्षत्रिय dj. tlestitute of क्षत्रिय. 30E ill. medicine. 378918 m. a chapter. 34917TH 11. not beginning. 347 pot. part. of ae with art, to be recited. * The nuun expressing duration is put in the accusative case.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. TTO 'n. 2777777 n. going to the end. HEIT (from with 377) he recites, repeats. gyom. year. अर्धकोटी/. (अर्ध 22. half, कोटोf. ten millions) five millions. HETTIE m. day and night. 379591A mn. one wishing to live a long life. आरम्भ, आदि in the loc. originally 34fta m. the seventh month of the Hindu year. Twith afa, to pass away. 57 adj. last. 999127 12. the ceremony of the investiture of उपनयन the sacred thread. #f the names of the three यजुष् . Vedas or a verse or मामन।. sentence from them. are n. business. alfala with ofc (from a 10th conj. to tell) enuinerated. HAITHTHT inl. 1.2me of a work. a with लत्ताप्रहारम् to kick. e CT m. the eglith incarnation of Vishnu. STT 927 m. the dark half of a month. e basta m. proper name. pa anlj. neuter. te n. the cavities of the human body, as mouth, nose, &c. 779 with air to go through, to pass. HTT# (74 m. conception, and STEA eighth) eighth from conception Tagius in. name of a prince. Ist conj. with 31 to rinse one's mouth. gaat f. mother of Krishna. ataris adv. for that time. GTER n. a dramatic play. qassis in. name of the great Sanscrit grammarian who has commented on Panini's work. afaa adj. sinful, apostate. 92. 4th conj. Atm. with a to amount to. uga n. a canto, a section. gfrædt f. service. T a guardian. a work containing legendary sacred stories, &c. 9919f9 in. the god Brahma. gata 19-(1997 f. progeny, in. cattle, and TĀ wish) one wishing for progeny and cattle. gafsa past. pt. exiled, or turned a recluse. 991797 m. traveller. giaregut n. (The f. talent 750 n. sign) a sign of talent. HETHT2 n, name of Patanjali's commentary on Panini. AETHTTGT 12. name of a great poem containing the history of the family of भरत. adj. principal. W with 7 to wash. राजधर्म n. (राजन king and धर्म duty) the duty of a king, Te in. name of a king. Traut 11. name of the king of Lankâ, the enemy of Rama. TRT n. hair. $ hogy sbs* ·78 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. warya adj. liring for a hun. dred years. f. a kind of tree. Duh m. the bright half of a month. 25. n. a born. वषटकार m. the cry वौषट् at the time of throwing an oblation into the fire; this is considered a deity. faat f. learning ; lore. face adj. knowing fax m. the third order or caste among the Hindus. m. a doctor. भिषक fea adj. sick. 18 m. the reputed author of the Mahâbhârata ; a Rishi. raut n. the fifth month of the Hindu year. वैद्य } 77797 m. conclare. parar m. year. ff.a verse repeated at the time of kindling the sacred fire. LESSON XV. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE DEGREES OF ADJECTIVES, &c. 1. GET is a termination of the comparative degree, and of the superlative. Before these the ending vowel of a word or the ending consonant, if any, with the preceding vowel, is dropped; as y, positive, fra comparativa, लघिष्ट superlutire; महत् pos., महीयस com., &c. 2. The Fe occurring in the words TST, TS, IT, PT, दृढ, and परिवृढ, is changed to र, as पृथु १०४., प्रथीयस com!'. and ORTO !!" 3. The final syllable (i. e. thro last vowel with the preceding consonant) of the words ET, T, TE, FAIT, and ind the portion of TT are dropped, and the preceding 1.el takes Guna, as स्थूल 110s., स्थवीयस comp., and स्थविष्ट v 1. The possessive terminations to be presently mentioned iire croppedd; as 7777 pos., urua comp., and धनिष्ठ 1.

·79 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. वृद्ध प्रेयस स्फेष्ठ गुरु many, much ö. The following is a list of the irregularities Superlative. Comparative. Positive. श्रेयस श्रेष्ठ प्रशस्य praiseworthy ज्यायस्' ज्येष्ठ old वर्षीयस् वर्षिष्ठः नेदीयस् नेदिष्ठ. अन्तिक near साधीयस् साधिष्ठ. बाढ firm, well प्रेष्ठ प्रिय dear स्थेष्ठ. स्थिर स्थेयस् firm स्फिर thick, much स्फेयस् heavy गरीयस् गरिष्ठ. wide वरीयस् वरिष्ठ. बंहीयर बंहिष्ट. बहल दोर्य long द्राधीयस् द्रापिष्ठ. बहु भूयस् भूयिष्ठ. (यवीयस (यविष्ठ (कनीयस् कनिष्ठ. (कनीयस् कनिष्ठ अल्प small (अल्पीयस् अल्पिष्ठ. 6. The comparative ending in should be declined in the manner shown in Lesson XXVII. Book First. Its feminine is formed by the addition off, and of the superlative by suffixing आ; as कनीयसी, कनिष्ठा. 7. तर is another comparative termination, the superlative corresponding to which is 79. These are applied not only to adjectives but to nouns, particles, and other indeclinables, and verbs. In the last case they take the forms तराम् and तमाम and also when added to indeclinables, except in those instances in which, with the terminations, the indeclinables form adjectives. The words to which these suffixes are added undergo no change :- many, much युवन् young ·80 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. . लघु Pos. लघुतरः, लघुतमः; पाचकतरः, पाचकतमः, पचति- तराम, पचतितमाम ; उच्चस्तराम, उच्चैस्तमाम् ; उच्चस्तरः adj. उच्चस्तमः adj. 8. The feminines of the adjectives ending in तर and तम, are formed by affixing 3TF. 9. Derivatives signifying the possessor of the thing expressed by the base are formed by suffixing it to substantives ; as धीमत्, talented, from धी talent. 10. The of this termination is changed to t when the base ends in म् or अ (short or long), or has either for its penultimate; as धनवत्, ealthy, from धन wealth, विद्या- वत्, यशस्वत: भास्वत्, किंवत्, लक्ष्मोवत. There are a fer exceptions, as यवमत्, भूमिमत्, &c. 11. To substantives ending in 37 the suffix is also added in this sense, before which the preceding 37 is dropped, as दण्डिन, धनिन्, &c. विन् is another termination having this sense. It is applied to some nouns. 12. दृश and दृश are appended to pronouns in the sense of " like." The final letter of the base is dropped, and 3r added to it, as तादृश " like that,” त्वादृश " like thee;" इदम् and किम् become anal की: as ईदृश. 18. The rerbal or other forms of कृ, भू, or sometimes अस्, are added to a noun on an indeclinable to express the duing or being like the thing derroted by the base. 1.1. The ending t or आ is changed to ई, except in the lidsre of an indeclinable. The preceding or 3 is rendered 11', and is changed to री. Final न and the स् or of मनस, अरुष, चक्षुष्, चेतस्, रहस्, and रजस् are dropped :- Ee.--धनीकरोनि, धनीभवनि, गङ्गीभवति, प्रत्यक्षीकरोति, म्वीकृनं ॥., शुचीभूतं .., पटूभवनं 1., मात्रीकरोति, दिवाभुता । , ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 81 ऋग्वेदात्सामवेदस्य महिमा भूयान्. यज्ञवर्मायोध्यां गच्छन्नध्वनोऽर्धाद्भूयोऽतिक्रम्याश्राम्यत्. कृष्णस्य सुभद्रा यवीयसी स्वसा. सर्वेषु कुसुमेषु शिरीषकुसुयं भ्रदिष्टेम्. निःश्रेयसाय कर्मपथाज्ञानमार्गः साधीयान्. परमात्माणोरप्पणीयान महतोपि महीयान् वर्तते. धार्तराष्ट्रेभ्यः पाण्डवाः कृष्णसाहाय्यात् बलीयांसः किन्तु तेषां योधसमाजो गरोयान. दुःखितस्य वृत्तान्तश्रवणेनाभवन्ति हृदयान्यनुकम्पिनां महा- मनाम. यो यज्ञकर्माणि यथाविधि करोति स प्रजावान्, पशुमान, तेजस्वी, ब्रह्मवर्चसी, यशस्वाँश्च भवति. विष्णुशर्मण एकपञ्चाशत् पुत्रा आसन्. तेषां ये मध्यमाहेव- दत्ताजज्यायांसः पञ्चविंशतिस्ते कनीयोभिः पञ्चविंशत्या कलह चक्रुः सर्वासु नदीषु भागीरथी द्राधिष्टा, विस्तारे वरिष्टा च तस्याः सलिलं यमुनायाः शुचितरं. पर्वतेषु हिमालयः प्रथिष्टः अहो दीप्तिमतोऽपि विश्वसनीयतास्य राज्ञो वपुषः. नैतद्विद्यः कतरन्नो गरीयो यद्वा जयेम यदि वा नो जयेयुः नेयं मे जटा किन्तु वेणीकृतः कचानां कलापः इत्यब्रवीत काचित्स्त्री. दासोभूतां सर्पाणां जनन्याः सेवां कुर्वती स्वमातरं बन्धनान्मु- मोच गरुडः तपश्चरन् रावणः स्वीयानि नव शिरांसि शिवायोपायनीच- कारेति शृणुम प्रियतमस्य पुण्डरीकस्य मरणेन सशोकया महाश्वेतया तिर स्कृता विषया दूरीकृतो बान्धवजनोऽङ्गीकृतमरण्येवस्थानम्.

·82 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. एकः पुरुषः प्रियतमायाः प्रासादस्योपरितनां भूमि प्रवेष्टु- मिच्छुर्वातायनादधोवलम्बमानमहिं रज्जूकृत्यारुरोह. उपरते भर्तरि यत्प्राणाः परित्यज्यन्ते तन्यौख्य, उत्तरा वि. राटदुहिता बालिका विनयति धीमति विक्रान्ते च पञ्चत्वम- भिमन्यावुपगतेऽपि प्राणान्न जही. अन्या अपि सहस्रशः कन्यका अमर्तृमत्यो जाताः सत्यो जीवितानि न तत्यजुरिति श्रूयते. Kausalyâ was the eldest of the three wives of Dasſaratha, and Kaikeyî the youngest. Sita's bodily form was more slender than Draupadi's. That the greater is equal to the less is absurd. In running, the horse is the swiftest of all animals. The virtuous are happy, and deserve respect. Rukmiņi was dearer to Krishna than Satyabhama. When one's luck is bad, even his relations become (as if they were) his enemies. What is he called who has wealth or fortitude, or fame or laud :* All should become as of one mind, and having taken this net should fly off. Indra was the mightiest and most powerful of all the gods, and therefore they crowned him king. The sense of the original passage is rendered (as if) clear by a commentator, and sometimes mystified. Damayanti was the most beautiful of all the women of the time, and the most devoted to her husband. Thy heart has at this moment (become as if a liquid) moltell through affection. The bullocks that are fastened to the yokes of carriages are fatter than common ones. * The student should answer this question.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 83 VOCABULARY XV. car. vas. Hur adj. little ; m. an atom; a species used by Vishạů as his small particle. अषस् ind. below; down. GET matted hair. 27577 m. road. sifaa n. life. waum adj. absurd. ATÉ m. (ta n. knowledge. #qafqm adj. compassionate. Fitfm. a way) way of know. af hy m. son of Arjuna. ledge. erana adj. hanging. टीकाकार] 379 m. n. a sore or wound. Hart n. a commentator. 27aeTa n. a residence, a. adj. slender. 37fm. a snake. fa f. splendour. $ adj. wet. adj. firm, strong. 32 adj. swift. 193}f. the wife of the Pânda- Tadj. wishing. FRITT f. daughter of a king fa:198 n. final beatitude. named Virâța. aftet m. a master, owner. Saftas adj. what is above. 979 n. running. egiga n. present. grat adj. fat. m. of one mind. greita n. a proper name; a ओजस् n. might; अजखिन् adj. lotus flower. mighty yg adj. large, great. 8 m. the hair. gry7 n. restraint. कर्मपथ m (कर्मन् and पथिन.) way atras m. relations. of action, i, e. performance of atfeat f. a daughter; a female religious ceremonies, &c. infant. 478 m. quarrel. maffia adj. 1. illumined by PGITT m. a bundle. the Vedas; 2. possessing the en adj. weak, thin. splendour conferred by the practice of the Vedic rites. wives of Das'aratha. 2 adj. very. TEOTTIETOT 11. help of Krishna. ### ado. middle ; . waist. on 1st conj. Paras. with syra #rhat f. name of the daughter to cross, to go over, to transof a Gandharva. gress. ayin m. original passage. 95 adj. small, mean. te n. folly. JTG m. eagle, the bird of that ogasa 1. a proper name: कैकयो । कोसत्या. } .)

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRITS getfafa adv. according to the fawada m. a proper name. rules laid down in ceremonial fagit m. extent. works. ETTER190 n. (E7ian history, at f. name of a river, account; Tau 1. hearing) A m. a yoke. hearing of history or ac 'योधसमाज m. (योघ a warrior, count. 9978 m. a multitude) mul- ETH m. bullock. titude of warriors. afur, aut f. braided hair. Ta with 39 to die. व्यासन devoted. af.a rope. fara TER 1. secrecy, solitariness, a farta n. a kind of flower. secret ; adv. secretly, solitarily. ufq adj. pure. Tiahuif. a wife of Krishna. 724TTf.a wife of Krishna. Ffn. water. ayun. the body. Fara adj. (3 with, T m. fa za udj. courageous, possesssorrow) afflicted with sorrow. ing prowess. Fall: ado. by thousands. Tazalgat f capacity to in G#57 f. wife of Arjuna. spire confidence. [sure. wat f. service. fare m. pleasure, sensual plea FF adj. short. che adj. small. LESSON XVI. COMPOUNDS. Dinlun (Copulatice) and Tatpurusha (Determinative). 1. 1. In Sanscrit one simple noun* may be compounded with another, and this compound with a third or another compound. In this manner we may have a compound consisting of any number of simple words. According to the sense or manner in which nouns are thus put together, compounds are divided into several classes. A compound ville class called Dvandva consists of nouns which, if not a'w?mpouled, would be joined by the copulative particle; रामश्च कृष्णश्च रामकृष्णी ; रामश्च, लक्ष्मणश्च, भरतश्च TETT, रामलक्ष्मणभरतशत्रुघ्राः. a alistative or an Adjective.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 85 ; >> 2. When the compound consists of two nouns, each being understood to be singular, it takes the dual; and plural when it contains more than two nouns. The gender of the final noun is the gender of the whole ; gheata Taifait; taar. Helfant. A Dvandva compound is singular and neuter when it implies an aggregate or when the things enumerated constitute one complex idea, as STITITRATGTTTH. This may be called the collective species of Drandva. When a compound consists of words signifying insects, limbs of the body of an animal, or objects between which there is a natural antipathy, or of common names not denoting an ani. mal, it is always of this nature; as यूकालिक्षम्, पाणिपादम, अहिनकुलम्, धानाशकुलि. In other cases this construction depends on the will of the speaker. 3. A word ending in and implying blood-relationship or some kind of learning, changes this vowel to 371 when followed by another word ending in ऋ or by पुत्र, as होता. Gratet, TITATI, Faalgati. 4. When a collective Dvandva compound ends in a letter of the palatal class, or, T, or, the vowel 3T is added on to it ; as वाकवचम्, त्वक्सनम्, शमीदृषदम्, वाविषम् छत्रोपानहम्. When it is not collective the 37 is not added, as in प्रावृटशरदौ. II. 1. A compound of the Tatpurusha class consists of two members, the first of which determines the sense of the other,* or is attributive to it. The attributive member may have the meaning of a case, or inay be used in apposition to the other, and consist, in this latter case, of an adjective or a substantive. The foriner we will call an inflectional com. pound, and the latter an appositional (named Karmadharaya in Sanscrit Grainmars), as TIST: 95T: TIST95T: (inflectioual); TUTT: 7: गम्भीरनाद: (app.) भवएव सागर: भवसागरः (app.); पुरुषः व्याघ्रइव 966047T: (app.) * In a fow cases the attributive member is placed after the other. 8 sts ·86 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. - :). There are six varieties of the first species, correspond ing to the six oblique cases :- Ace. कृष्णश्रितः कृष्णं श्रितः, दुखापन्नः = दुःखमापन्नः, स्वर्गगतः = स्वर्ग गतः. Insti. शङलाख खण्डः, कु मात्रा सदृशः, वाकलहः = वाचा कलहः, नखभिन्नः नभिन्नः, वातच्छेद्यम् = वातेन छेद्यम्. Dut. दूपदारु यूपाय दारु, भूतबलिः = भूतेभ्यो बलिः गोहितम् = गवे हितम्. All. चोरभयम् =चोराद् भयम्, स्वर्गपतितः, =स्वर्गात्पतितः (Fen. देवताराधनम् = देवतानामाराधनम्. Loc. कलानिपुणः कलासु निपुणः, वाकपटुः वाचि पटुः The compound of 37 and 377, implying negation with noun, belongs to the Tatpurusha class. 3. When the first member of an appositional compound is it numcrul it is called in Sanscrit Dvigu. A Dvigu implies an aggregate; as त्रयाणां भुवनानां समाहारः = त्रिभुवनम्. 4. The nouns ara and TTGTT occurring at the end of a 'Latpurusha ; ऋच, पुर, धुर, and पथिन् at the end of any compound; TIF when pirecelul luy il numeral or an indeclinable ur certain other words, * drop the final vowel, or the penultinate with the following consonant, and add अ as मद्रराज. कृष्णसखः, स्वर्गपथः, द्विरात्रम्; अतिरात्रम्, पूर्वरात्रः. अहन, when it is in the same circumstances as TIET, is changed to अ, but when it constitutes the latter member of a Drigu cap wound or is preceded by some other word, the final of only is dropped, as पूर्वाहः, चहा, उत्तराहः. a -- * Viz. a word expressive of a part, such as संख्यात and पुण्य. पूर्व, अपर, &c. अहः, सर्व, ·DECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 87 5. A Tatpurusha follows the gender of the final noun. The collective Dvigu is neuter, and that ending in 37 is oftentimes feminine and takes the suffix ई; as राजपुरुषः, नख- भिन्नः-ना-नम्, पञ्चगवम् (from पञ्चन and गो) पञ्चपात्रम्, त्रिलोकी. A Tatpurusha (in all its species) ending in रात्र, अह, and अह is masculine, but when रात्र is preceded by ta numeral it is neuter, as पूर्वरात्रः, मध्याहः सप्ताहः, द्विरात्रम्. 6. When a neuter Dvigu or Dvanda ends in a long vowel it is shortened. The short vowel corresponding to sit and श्री is उ, and to e, and ऐ is इ (द्विखारि from द्वि and खारी it measure of grain.) प्रयागे चतुरहमुषित्वा काशीपथमुपर्ययावुद्दालक: रविवासरस्य चरमरात्रे संसाराङ्गारतप्तः कश्चित्पुरुषश्चिच्छे- दात्मनः शिरः. आश्विनस्याये नवरात्रे दुर्गाया महोत्सवः क्रियते. ननु प्रभाता रजनी तच्छोघं शयनं परित्यजामि अथवा लघु लघुत्थितापि किं करोमि न मे दुःखाचितेषु प्रभातकरणीयेषु हस्तपादं प्रसरति. इज्याध्ययनदानानि तपः सत्यं धृतिः क्षमा । अलोम इति मार्गोऽयं धर्मस्याष्टविधः स्मृतः॥ रोगशोकपरीतापबन्धनव्यसनानि च । आत्मापराधवृक्षाणां फलान्येतानि देहिनाम् ।। कृत्वा लाभालाभी जयाजयो। ततो युद्धाय युज्यस्व नैवं पापमवाफ्यसि ॥ धर्मार्थकाममोक्षाणां यस्यैकोऽपि न विद्यते । अतागलस्तनस्येवं तस्य जन्म निरर्थकम् ।। *सुखदुःखे समे * Spoken by Kțishna to Arjuna who had expressed his unwillingness to fight ·SS SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. यदेतदनुमरगं नाम तदनि निष्फलम्. अविद्वज्जनाचरित एष मार्गः, मोहविलसितमेतत्, अज्ञानपद्धतिरिय, रभसाचरितमिदं क्षुद्रदृष्टिरेषा, अतिप्रमादोऽयं, मोर्यस्खलितमिदं, यदुपरते पितार, भ्रातरि, सुहृदि, भर्तरि, ना प्राणाः परित्यज्यन्ते स्वयं चेन्ननहति न परित्याज्याः. अत्र हि विचार्यमाणे स्वार्थ एव प्राणपरित्यागो यमसह्यशोकवेदनाप्रतीकारत्वादात्मनः; उपरतस्य तु न कमपि गुणमावहति न तावत्तस्यायं प्रत्युज्जीवनोपायः, न धर्मोपचयका- रणं, न शुभलोकोपार्जनहेतुः, न निरयपातप्रतीकारः, न दर्शनो. पायः, न परस्परसमागमनिमित्तम् अन्यामेव स्वकर्मफल परि. पाकोपचितामसाववशो नीयते भूमिम्, असावप्यात्मवातिनः केवलमेनसा संयुज्यते. The master teaches us cight times in a fortnight.* The priests perforni an Agnishtoma sacrifice in six days. The glory of Râma's exploits was sung in the seven scargas and soren pútálas. The duties of Brúhmanns: Kshatriyas, Tais'yas, and S'ústras are mentioned in the Smritis of Manu, Yájneralkya, anddsita. The alliance of Rûma aml Sugrimu was basel on conditions tin tututtssistư. Raghu, who took with him his great army going towarls the onsturn sell, appeared like Bhagiratha, who led Ganyà, Muller from the mattel hair of Sicu. Traversing the castern countries in this manner, the conyueror reached the coast of the greult occan, (which appeared) k on acrount of the forests of lá!i tres. 11:1viny rooted out the Vingas (who were), herughty on "!!!!nt 'thrin ploct of shijs, he crected triumphal columits in the regione butuccen the brainches (streams) of Canja. * The stuilent bould use Sauscrit compounds for the words printed in Italics. 987 Decores o fl in an appositional Tatpurusha or Bahuvriki. + ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 89 The king of Kalinga received him with missiles, as the mountains received Indra, prepared to cut (their) wings, with stones. The conqueror took away the wealth and not the land of the lord of Mahendra (who was), captured and released. The sea, though pushed afar by the arrow of Paras'uramaz appeared as if touching the mountain Sahya on account of his extensive army (which joined the two). VOOABULARY XVI. Ton. sin. m. an ocean. afuera m. a kind of sacrifice. euca adj. dead, ceased. भङ्गार TT m. n. burning charcoal. Uite n. what is to be done, a 391 f. a she-goat. work to be got through. faget m. great carelessness. #4 with afr or 84T 1st conj. अद्भुतचरित x. an exploit. Paras. to traverse. HATOT N. following in death, TT 11, throat. or dying after, as in the case 19 past part. of 48, capof widows burning themselves tured. with or on the dead bodies of TUT m. efficacy, advantage. their husbands. affaat m. a killer, a murderer. भर्गव # adj. last. BYTH m. loss. 99 m. victory, triumph. BOTH m. contentment, absence at m. a palm-tree. of greed. fra adj. embodied, having 3797 adj. being in the power of body; m. a man, the soul. another, dependant. fate m, hell. 37 insufferable. fara adj. useless, vain. 376 n. a missile. uafa f. a way, practice. pierea adj. followed, prac- UT15 in, an exploit, a deed. tised; n. practice, act. glag m. pain, affliction. Tea in. name of a person. ofrua adj. deserving to be 3999 m. storing, store, gatherabandoned. ing ufrota m. becoming mature, Efqa past. pt. off with 9, maturity. collected. Der m. fortnight. > * The nom. pl. m. of this is ach or TRT: 8 sbg* ·90 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. } ora m. falling, fall. AGT: n. plural, the name of a Sragi f. condition. ग fars 1 m. help against an people or their country. gatait / eril, a remedy. ater m. n. a day. faat 'ATO (pres. part. Atm. of प्रत्युज्जीवन n. restoring to life the pass. of the caus. of gt to again, revival. go, with fa) what is being qara adj. (past part. of with thought upon or considered. 9), disappeared (as darkness) fafea n. a wanton pastime, a and appeared (as light) n. wicked trick. daybreak at f. agony. n. a root, basis. E m. foolishness, infatuation. To adj. gloomy, dark. 31. alliance. yarar m. a fleet of ships of FIT m. world. Fifca with past part. cansal Te n. hastiness, rashness. of with ex, pushed afar. fism. disease ; sickness. - TEIO R. assistance. planta adj. early. mafuta n. a slip, a mistake.' pro adj. touched. 59 m. the nipple, female breast. TH m. acquisition, gain. TH m. a column. af 1st conj. Paras, and Atm. erat n. a stream or branch of with 21 to bring. a river. Fam. one's duty. war. LESSON XVII. BAHUTKUL AND ANYAVIBAYA COMPOUNDS. 1. 1. An appositional compound with the attributive member placed first may be used as an adjective to qualify a substantive. In this case the compound is called Bahuvrihi; 23 महाबाहुः, पोताम्बर:. As a Karmadhāraya, महाबाहुः is equivalent to HR alt: grcat arm; but as a Bahuvrihi, it stands for en agter, he whose arm is great, i. e. greatarmed; so also afat: he whose garment is yellou. 2. Sometimes an inflectional compound may become a Bahurrihi, as चक्रपाणिः चक्रं पाणी यस्य, he in whose hands there is a wheel.

·91 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. as a ; 3. When comparison is involved a genitive compound becomes a Bahuvrihi, as चन्द्र कान्तिः, equivalent to चन्द्रस्य #17: as a Tatpurusha ; but areT ET FETTET Bahuvrihi. 4. A compound of words denoting the cardinal points belongs to this class, and means the point or direction between those points ; as 5aaf, north-east. A noun signifying a direction, which when uncompounded is declined like a pronoun, is optionally so declined when thus compounded. 5. A compound of or Twith a substantive when used as an adjective is a Bahavrihi ; as देवदत्तः सहपुत्रो ग्राम TGT:. 6. An adjectival compound of a numeral or an indeclinable, or of SAT, 37, or 37 Er with a numeral, is a Bahuvrihi. In this case, the final vowel, or the final consonant with the preceding vowel, of the latter numeral, and the Fa in the case of Fairtra are dropped. Ex. FETT: 'two or three,' FEFETT: 'twice ten,' CTT:' about ten,' ie.'nine or eleven,' reqrati: 'nearly twenty,' TETÉRTT: not far from thirty,' ferrari TITI: 'more than forty.' 7. When the last word of a Bahuvrihi ends in Ft, or is a feminine noun ending in or 3, the termination is added on to it; as ईश्वरकर्तृकम् ईश्वर: कर्ता यस्य तत्, (जगद्); बहुनदीका बहवः नयो यस्मिन् सः रूपवद्वधूक: 8. If a Bahuvrihi ends in 37FT, or TT, these words assume the form of 37&T, and att; HTAT: 'lotus-eyed,' अधिज्यधन्वा 'one whose bow is strung.' If it ends in गन्ध, this word becomes गन्धि, when उद्, पूति, सु or सुरभि precedes, or when the compound involves comparison ; ou, HTT, TT, &c. Similarly ref becomes that when (QRT:);

·92 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. preceded by a single word. When the ending word does not undergo such changes, F is optionally added to all compounds of this class ; अध्ययननिमित्तको मे वासोस्मिन् ग्रामे 9. The final vowel of a Bahuvrihi compound is shortened when no termination is added. चित्रागावो यस्य सः,चित्रगुः; लक्ष्मी भार्या यस्य सः, लक्ष्मीमार्यः. If the inal be the fe. minine termination 3T, it is optionally shortened when followed by क; us लक्ष्मीमार्याकः or लक्ष्मीभार्यकः II. 1. Adverbial compounds (375742TT) are formed by putting togetber an indeclinable (a preposition or an adverb) and a noun. Adveros are to be considered as neuter accusative singulars. Adverbial compounds ending in 3 take sometimes the terminations of the instrumental or loca. tive singular. A final long vowel becomes short. The end. ing T is dropped, but optionally when the final substantive of the compound is neuter :-अधिहरि in Hari, अनुविष्णु after Vishnu, i.e. following Vishnu, उपगङ्गम् near the Ganga, अनुगङ्गम along with or by the side of the Ganga, यथाशक्ति according to abilities, अध्यात्मम् on or in the soul, प्रत्यहम् everry day, सतृणम् together with grass. भाया यद्यदिष्टं तत्तदधिज्यधन्वनस्तस्य भूपते नासायं किञ्चिदासीत्. प्रतिदिनं यम्बकं यथाविधि पूजयामि यावदवकाशं ग्रन्थान- वलोकयामि आमध्यान्हसमयमक्षमालां गृहीत्वा तपामि. त्रिचतान्यहान्यस्मिन्मे गृहे वस्तुं समर्हसि यावत्तवार्थसिद्धिं करीमि. आसन्नपञ्चशा गा ब्राह्मणेभ्यो ददाद्यज्ञवर्मा श्रावणस्य प्रथमे सोमवासरे.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 93 चिरप्रवृत्त एष मृतस्य पुनर्जीवप्रदाने पन्थाः. तथाहि विश्वा- वसुना गन्धर्वराजेन मेनकायामुत्पन्नां प्रमद्वरा नाम कन्यामा- शोविषविलुप्तजीवितां स्थूलकेशाश्रमे भार्गवस्य नप्ता प्रमनित- नयो मुनिकुमारको रुरुर्नाम स्वायुषो धैन योजितवान्. अर्जुनं चाश्वमेधतुरगानुसारिणमात्मजेन बभ्रुवाहननाम्ना समरशिरसि शरापहृतप्राणमुलूपी नाम नागकन्यका सोच्छ्वा. समकरोत. अभिमन्युतनयं च परिक्षितमश्वत्थामास्त्रपावकपरिपुष्टमुद- रापरतमेव निर्गतमुत्तराप्रलापोपजनितकृपो भगवान् वासुदेवो दुर्लभानसून प्रापितवान्. * यान्येव सुरभिकुसुमधूपानुलैपनादीनि, चन्द्रापीडसमागम- सुखोपभोगायानीतानि तैरेव मृते तस्मिन् देवतोचितामपचिति सम्गद्य चन्द्रामीडमूर्ती मूर्तिमतीव शोकवृत्तिरातरूपा रूपान्तर- मिव तत्क्षणेनैवोपगता गतीवितेव शून्यमुखी मुखावलोकिनी चन्द्रापीडस्य पीडोत्पीडितहृदयापि रक्षन्ती बाप्पमोक्षमुद्दामवृत्तेः शोकादपि मरणादपि च कष्टतमामवस्थामनुभवन्ती तथैवा) समारोपितचन्द्रापीडचरणदया दूरागमन खिन्नेनापि बुभुक्षिते- नाप्यप्रतिपन्नस्नानपानभोजनेन मुक्तात्मना राजपुत्रलोकेन स्वप- रिजनेन च सह निराहारा कादम्बरी तं दिवसमनयत. अयं निजः परो वेति गणना लघुचेतसाम् । उदारचरितानां तु वसुधैव कुटुम्बकम् ।। I saw fire or six men, more thun fifty-fice cows, and nearly sixty doys on the road. This is the king of Angas, whose love has been sought by celestial lamsels. * This refers to Kaddinbarî, a damsel who goes to a certain appointed place to meet her lover Chandrápidla, but finds him dead. llopes have been held out lo lier by some supernatural power of her lurd's revival, and slig has buen directed o preserve lhis body, ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. In him the goddesses S'ri and Sarasvatî, whose places by nature are different, live together. The king, who heart the account of Vanås vetå, was not able to say a word, overcome with grief. This is a king of the mame of Parantapa, whose truth is unfathomable, and who has obtuined great fame by keeping his subjects contented. I now explain the principles of Nyâya, according to my abilities. Locusts fiy towards the fire. Raghu erected a trophy or triumphal column on every mountain. Janasthana is situated on the banks of (along the side of) the Gollärari. Having sent the girl to her husband's house, and being ts if I had paid back a deposit, I am now at ease. This is the loril of Aranti, who is long-armed, broailbreasted, and slenler-waisteil. The lotus-eyed maid, whose limbs were delicate, did not fix her affections on him. Sunandâ spoke to the moon-faced damsel (whose face was like the moon) when she reached the place where was sitting Humâugada, the Lord of Kalingas, whose arm was Hilurneul with ulnyaulas, whuse power wus cynul to that of the mountain Juhendra, and who by his prouess hud destroyeil his enemies. VOCABULARY XVII. अङ्गद n. an ornament worn on अक्षमाला f. (अक्ष the name of a mant, or its seed, and af wreath or a string) a rosary ut 3737. 24TH W. unfathomable. 345 m. the lap. the arms above the elbow. Bfna m. one whose bow is strung 3477539 n. pleasing, keeping contented.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 95 आयुस् n. life. 27@# 1. an ointment. m. incense. अपचिति f. worship. faq m. a deposit. 37Tef. a celestial damsel. FTTTFIT adj. not having eaten, ** m. object of desire. fasting. hum. name of a kind of fagot m. mature. sacrifice. afcfera m. son of afany and 376 m. the fire vital breaths; grandson of अर्जुन. life (in this sense it is used in frogam. an attendant, a servant the plural number). afrge adj. past part. of 3 to w a particle, showing up to. scorch, to burn. arra past part of 77; brought. saria past part. of the caus. of Fi with pfa; paid back. 377 $ adj. troubled, distressed. gafa m. the name of a person. fraraq m. a snake. FAPTTf. name of a woman. Berg adj. obtainable. sifaga past act. part. of the 37189 n. place. cays. of 3414 vith 7, haring 3797 adj. born. made to get; having given. EZIT adj. noble, generous. arou m., n. a tear. SET#fh adj. of a wild disposi- quaranta adj. hungry. tion; inordinate, excessive. hia m. name of a Rishi. en adj. haughty. 787 . m. the waist, the mid- 99faa anj. produced. Cqñrs m. enjoyment. af.a celestial damsel. Fanf. the name of a serpent #7 m. & great rogue. damsel, for some time a wife gifafa adv. according to the of Arjuna. 42741 f. daughter. eran adv. as long as. aterari f. the name of a damsel. Siis aga past act. part. of the gigtaan n. family. cars. of yot having joined. ATTai in. a young boy. 78 m. the name of a person. Jaafaa adj. dead. hren with a 1st conj. Atm. or fergen adj. having long been 10th conj. to look at, to sec. in practice. famy adj. destroyed. Fu Ist conj. Paras. to pro- fatag m. the name of a Gannounce in a low voice; to dharva. mutter (prayers). far to adj. broad. y m. son. [S'iva. yet f. having no liveliness tam in. an epithet of Rudra ; on the face ; pale-faced ; of a gqat f. a deity. dejected countenance. dle part. sacred precept.

·16 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. a n. truth. समागम m. company, association. Fartriqa adj. placed. सार n. power, pith. सुरभि adj. fragrant. साच्छ्वाम adj. having breath. स्थून केश m. the name of a sage. हेमाङ्गद हमाङद m. a proper name. क LESSON XVIII. CAUSALS. 1. The causal of a root is formed by the addition of अय, and making the same vowel changes as before the 3707 of the 10th conjugation; करोति ' he makes, कारयति ' he causes to make.' 2. The causal form takes either pada. 8. Roots ending in अम् (except कम्, अम् and चम्), जन्, बृ, दल, वल; त्रप्, वन्, and several others not very important do not change their vowel. वम्, नम्, वन, and ज्वल change their 37 optionally; but necessarily when preceded by a preposition. 4. Roots ending in 371, ही, and ऋ, add on the augment प् before अय. 5. Ruots ending in 5, 9, 371 or afi substitute 37 for their vowels. (See Lesson XI. 13.) 6. A shortens its आ necessarily; ग्लै and स्ना optionally, but when preceded by a preposition, necessarily; as क्षपति, ग्लपयति or ग्लापयति, प्रग्लपयति. 7. रुह substitutes for ह opticuully ; as रोपयति or रोहयति. हन् becomes धात्. ९. र and लभ insert a uasal before the final, as रम्भ- यनि. लग्भयते. '. शो, छो, सो, हे, व्ये, वे, uud पा add र instead of प् Ufore अय: aud पा, 'to protect,' adds ल ; शाययति, सायafa, dic. The roots fst, , and with 37ft, substitutu off for their vowels ; !S नापयति, कापयति, and अध्यापयति. , - ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 97 10. The ending 37 of 70 is dropped when followed by a porel. 37TT itself is dropped before the past participial termination and before such as begin with T; the vowel changes however are retained; as विद् 'to know,' विदित 'known,' and वेदित 'made known.' संहृत्य prim: संहार्य caus , The 3To with its last 3 droppedis retained after a root having a short pepultimate before the 7 of the indeclinable past parts, as प्रणमय्य. 11. The causal forms of roots of the 10th conjugation are the same as the primitive. 12. When the causal forms of intransitive roots and such as imply motion, knowledge or information, and eating, and of T are used, the agent of the verb in its primitive sense is put in the accusative case. This rule is optional in the case of and . In other cases the primitive agent is in the instrumental case. . शत्रूनगमयत्स्वर्ग वेदार्थ स्वानवेदयत् । आशयच्चामृतं देवान् वेदमध्यापयद्विधिम् । आसयत्तलिले पृथ्वीं यः स मे श्रीहरि- र्गतिः॥ यजमानो यज्ञकर्म ऋविम्भिरारम्भयति. इन्द्रः स्वयशः किन्नर मिथुनैापयामास. कृष्णवर्मा पुत्रेण ब्राह्मणेभ्यः प्रत्यहं शतं गा दापयति. जानकी रथमारोप्य जान्हवीतीरमासाद्य रामाज्ञापितो लक्ष्य- णस्तां जही. प्रभुप्रसादलवो प्यधीरप्रकृतेर्दासजनस्य प्रागल्भ्यं जनयति. असुरस्य तिग्मतपसा प्रीतात्मा भगवान् शङ्करः स्वीयं रूपं तं दर्शयामास. नगेन्द्रसक्तां दृष्टिं पार्थे कस्यापि ऋन्दितमाकर्ण्य राजा निव- तयामास अस्मिन्लोके अष्टितो धर्मस्तस्य कर्तारं स्वर्गलोकं प्रापयति. 9 sbs ·98 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. श्रीष्मकाले धर्मो अङ्गानि ग्लपयति स्वेदं प्रवनयति तृष्णां परि- वर्धयति. बहिरि प्रवृत्तमृषिकुमारकं प्रवेशयितुं प्रतिहारीमाज्ञाप- -यांमास राजा. स्वीयं यशः पौरुषं च गुप्तये कथितं च यत् । कृतं यदुपकाराय धर्मज्ञो न प्रकाशयेत् ॥ चिरनष्टमात्मनो बालक दृष्ट्वा सा सुन्दरी भृशं रुरोद तं च दृढं परिष्वज्याश्रुभिः स्नपयामास. वेदाविनाशिनं नित्यं य* एनमजमव्ययम् । कथं स पुरुषः पार्थ के घातयति हन्ति कम् ।। नैनं छिन्दन्ति शस्त्राणि नैनं दहति पावकः । नचैनं क्लेदयन्त्यापो न शोषयति मारुतः ॥ संयोजयति विद्येव नीचगापि नरं सरित् । समुद्रमिव दुर्धर्ष नृपं भाग्यमतः परम् ।। यदि सत्याभिसन्धस्त्वं राजन् रामं प्रवासय । नव पञ्च च वर्षाणि निर्जने गहने वने ॥ युधिष्ठिरस्तु कौन्तेयो मयमाहूय सत्वरम् । कारयामास वै तेन सभामद्भुतदर्शनाम् ।। दृष्टिस्तृणीकृतजगत्रयसत्वसारा, धीरोद्धता नमयतीव गतिर्धरित्रीम् । कौमारके पि गिरिवद्गुरुतां दधानो, बीरो रसः किमयमेत्युत दर्प एव ।। The king makes the Brâhmaņas accept the moner. Vasishtha caused Das'aratha to perform a sacrifice. The wicked deeds of Bajirâja make us blush. Inilra caused Mâtali to bring Arjuna to Heaven in his Orn car. * This refers to the soul whether of man or the universe.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIŤ. 99 He first makes men confide in him, and then destroys them (makes them perish). Being commanded by his Guru he every day fed his cows and made them drink water. He finished his morning devotiors, after which he fed, sixteen Brâhmaņas and then took his own meal. Rama's going to a forest to live there for fourteen years pocasioned Das'aratha's death. Sanjaya made Dhritarashtra hear (told him) what happened on the field of battle, where the Pândavas and the sons of Dhritarashtra were fighting. It is fate that makes sometimes brothers and friends fight with each other, and occasionally causes a man even to cut off his own head. A father should marry his daughter to a well-behaved young man, of a respectable family and of good education. The verses that this boy has repeated remind me of the times in which I lived on the top of mount Prasravana with my beloved, and my brother Lakshmaņa. The S'yáparnas went to the Yajna of Saushadmana, and took their seats within the Vedi, whereupon the king ordered his men to unseat (make them stand) them; they accordingly unseated them. While being unseated, they cried aloud. VOCABULARY XVIII. 3791 adj. unborn. 37277 adj. immutable. 3781C adj. not of a sound or 75+ m. a demon, an evil spirit. grare mind. fe adv. occasionally, Bf Fugaar f. promise, determina farar m. a certain class of demition. gods. 3*Ist conj. Paras. to move. enourasa m, the name of a per- 3479 n. the beverage of gods ; nectar. TATTo n. boyhood. ** m. meaning ; trte sense. zafarafat adj. imperishable, feng 4th conj. Paras, to make undergoing no transformation. wet. son. marga n. cry.

·100 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. waste away. e Ist conj. Parzs. to pine or fact adj. eternal, constant. lan adj. low, mean. afa f. movements, walk. are m. the name of Arjuna. a adj. impassable, impregna. OTTU n. manliness, prowess. ble. safa f. disposition. fx f. secrecy. sferit f. a female doorkeeper, Ttat f. greatness, grandeur, TU 777 n. pride, boldness. majesty O m. the name of an architect. ग्रह with प्रति to accept. मारतm. wind. @ 1st conj. Paras. to become faga n. a couple, a pair. exhausted 2nd conj. Paras. & Atm. to a m. heat. cry aloud. Ralf. the Ganges. # 1st conj. Paras. to romit. T 1st conj. Paras. to blaze, q lst conj. Atm. to cover. to burn, 17 m. warlike feeling ; one fare adj. austere, severe. of the nine sentiments. atott f. thirst. श्रीहरि m. the name of the god 99 n. triad. Vishnu. 1st conj. Paras. to burst, to with fq, to confide. #foon. water. # adj. inaccessible. 75 with to occasion (causal). cat f. the earth. m. sweat. qism, the mountain Himalaya. tear. LESSON XIX. AORIST. 1. The so-called aorist expresses simply the completion of an action without reference to any particular time, or a recent or this day's action. It is similar to the English present perfect, which the student will remember “defines an action as having happened in a portion of time which is not terpired : it brings a past action into connection with the present time." The aorist should never be used in narratives.* अनि ते वै पुत्रः : (Ait. Brâhmaņa)'a son has been • In the later Sanscrit literature the three past tenses are promiscuously used, Do distinction being observed between them.

·101 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. > born to thee ;' तदहं तुभ्यमेव ददामि य एवं सत्यमवादीः (Ait. Brahmaņa) 'I give that to thee who hast told the truth;" उश्रिय उषसो रोचमाना TEST: : (Rîg-Veda Sanhita) 'the bright splendours of the dawn have arisen (begin to appear). 2. The aorist is used with the prohibitive particle IT and has then the sense of the Imperative. The temporal aug. ment is in this case dropped. At a TT: 'Do not go ;' AT À FTAFETTAT : ferouri, May He who is the creator of the earth, not hurt (kill) us ! 3. There are seven varieties of the aorist. The temporal augment 37 is prefixed to the roots in this tense as in the imperfect. I. First Variety. > 1. The terminations of the imperfect are applied to roots with the exception of that of the third person plural, which in this case is 3. Before FF the preceding 371, if any, is dropped. 2. पा to drinls, स्था, दा,धा, and other roots assuming the forms of CT and ET in virtue of rule 13, page 50, TT, which is substituted for T, to go, in the aorist, and it to be, belong to this variety. 3. The third person plural termination in the case of u is 3TT; and before the terminations beginning with a vowel व् is added on toभू. 4. ET, , TT, at, and gì, are conjugated in this way optionally (remember rule 13, page 50). Their other forms are made up according to the sixth variety. E takes the third aorist also. 5. This variety is Parasmaipadi exclusively. Such of the roots belonging to this variety as are Åtmanepadi also take the fourth or fifth form in that Pada. 9 sbs* ·102 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 6. Eto give. STETTE अदाव अदाम अदाः STEITA अदात अदात् अदाताम् अदुः II.-Second Variety. 1. BT is added on to the root; and then the terminations of the imperfect of the first class of conjugations are appended. The vowels do not take their Guņa or Vriddhi substitute. 2. This variety is Parasmaipadi with but a few exceptions. 3. Some roots are conjugated in this way optionally and some necessarily. The most important of these are given in the following list:- Necessarily. * () to call. a to perish. fog to anoint. 98 to hurt, to act the traitor. fra to sprinkle to be silly. These three roots when Ât fee to bear affection to. manepadi take this form op- Te to be calm, tionally, a to be distressed in body or to devour. mind. & to be dejected, to sit. to be tamed. u to cut. 9 to exert one's self, y to wander, to err. au to move, to creep. * to forgire. to nourish. A to be fatigued go to be satisfied. 95 to be mad. go to be depraved. are (9) to throw. as to be angry. zy to be thirsty. Je to be purified. Par to be glad. fou to be ready. 7 to covet. गम to go. • The torins which some roots assume before 3 are enclosed within brackets, 13-आस्थम् ; अव्ह + अम् - अव्हम्.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 103 et to be greedy.' Par to be able Jy to leave, release. py to cut. T to know. a to shine. 97 (ate) in Paras. & Atm. to speak. RTĘ (Peru) to govern, to rule, to regulate. fou to pulverize, to grind. 9a (9) to fall. fry to distinguish. TTC to obtain. er in Paras. & Atm. (@) to tell. Optionally. The following roots are generally FR (ET) to see. Âtmanepadi, but when they षट् to cry. take this form of the Aorist for to embrace. they become Parasmaipadi :- 29 to be satisfied. Et to be proud. Tą to obstruct. खिद् to perspire. frs to penetrate. Tyto shine. for to cut off. 74 to shine, to look decent. fae to separate. go to become agitated. Te to reduce to powder. 99 () to fall down. y to join. fre to make empty. (€) to perish. (T) to become old. 2 (27) to fall. ege to break off. or to proclaim. EHT to increase. f(a) to swell. PETARE (ere) to drop. fast to wash off. q to make for, to tend towards. go to drop. and (caus.) to propose, to FHM (14) to obstruct. plan. ST (9) to jump upwards. Fogy takes the seventh form, besides this, Fe, the third and the fifth, and the rest the fourth or fifth according as they are anit or set. en to be. अपुषम् अपुषः. अपुषत् अपुषाव अपुषतम् अपुषताम् अपुषाम अपुषत अपुषन् ·101 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. III.-Third Variety. ܝ 1. The aorist forms of roots of the tenth conjugation and of causals are made up in this way. 2. The 37 is dropped, but the vowel changes and others effected in the primitive root before it are retained. The penultimate vowel is shortened. Then the root is to be reduplicated according to the general rules. If the syllable following the reduplicated one be short and not prosodially* long, (a) 37 of the reduplicated syllable is changed to $; (6) and its vonel generally, when short and not prosodially long, is lengthened. To the base so prepared are to be appended 34, and the terminations of the Imperfect, as in the second variety:- Thus from TTTT (the causal of T), by dropping 374, we have IT, by shortening the penultimate to, by reduplication That; by changing the reduplicated 3T to , fatt; by lengthening the , and by applying 3T and the termination, अबीभवत्. 3. If a root begins with a vowel, the following consonant with added to it is reduplicated. When a conjunct consonant with T, T, or as its first member follows the initial vowel the second member is reduplicated. Ex. TIETT from the causal of अद, आर्जिहत् from the causal of अह, from the causal of JRC &c. In the two latter instances 37 and 5 are set aside and and with added to them are reduplicated. 4. If a root ends in 3, short or long, that vowel is to be substituted for in the reduplicated syllable when the following syllable does not begin with a letter of the labial class or T, 1,5, I, or T, followed by 27; as, causal-RITTU-WIT, -कव्,-चकव, andचिकन्, but as the root ends in उ, we have ਕੀਪਏ ; * A syllable is proscuially long when, being short itself, it is followed by a conjuoct coosonant.

·. SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 105 we have - चुकम्, चूकम्, अचूकवत् ; but in the case of भू. or पू, अबीभवत्, or अपीपवत्, and not अबूभवत्, or अपूपवत्. The { is optionally retained in the case of सु, श्रु, द्रु, गु, and च्यु. Ex. STETSTTT or 37TTTT aor.cąus, of 5. The following roots shorten their penultimate optionally:- माज, भाष, भास्, दीप, जीव, मील, पीड; and also व्हे, लुट, लुप्, and a few others, as अपीपिडत् or अपिपीडत्. 6. The vowel changes mentioned in Article 2, i. e. the shortening of the penultimate, the substitution of for 3 and the lengthening of the vowel of the reduplicated syllable, do not take place in the case of the following roots :- कथ, वर्, शद, रह, स्पृह, सूच, मार्ग, मृग, ध्वन, वार्; as अचकथत्, अववरत्, from कथ, and वर. 7. The t of the reduplicated syllable of स्मृ, दृ, त्वर,प्रथ, , , and that, is preserved, and the # of those of are and चेष्ट is optionally changed to अ, as असस्मरत्, अददरत्, &c. and अववेष्टत्, अविवेष्टत. 8. गण has two forms, अजगणत् or अजीगणत्. 9. The roots नि, and सु, take the third variety in the primitive form, as sifaTESTUT. (see page 101, Art. 4) drops its 37T after reduplication. 10. स्थापयति has अतिष्ठिपत्; पाययति, अपीष्यत् and प्रापयति, अजिघ्रपत् or अजिधिपत्. 11. The penultimate short Te of a root is optionally retained, and long ऋ optionally shortened ; as अवीवृतत् अववर्तत् from the causal of वृत्; अचिकीर्तत् or अचीकृतत् from कृत, 10th conj. 12. Some roots, the most important of which are लोक, लोच, शास्, श्लाघ, बाप, सेव, वेप्, एज, लाघ, राध, ताय, दाश, or ·108 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT." योध्, and राज do not shorten the penultimate, as अलुलोकत and अततायत्. This variety is Atmanepadi and Parasmaipadi; as अपूपुजत् or अपुपूजत्. 13. व्हे and स्वप् are in the aorist of the causal to be taken as and FT and Flag optionally as T; as अजूहवत् or अजु हावत् by Art. ; असूषुपत्, अशुशवत् or अशिश्वियत्. काशों गन्तुकामः श्रीनगरान्निरगात् पण्डितः सह परिवारेण. भगोर्यमा सविता पुरन्धिर्मह्यं त्वादुर्गार्हपत्याय देवाः. तस्मिन् गुर्वनुचरे गृहं प्रविष्टे यूयं किंमधुनोदस्थात? गुरुरय- मिति मत्वा अस्मिनिर्जने वने नष्टमश्चमियन्तं कालमन्विष्यन्नपि न समासदम्. इदमाम्रफलं वृक्षादपप्तत्, यदि रोचते गृहीत्वा स्वादस्व. हे गले यदीदृशेभ्यः पापेभ्यो मामुददीधरस्ततः सत्यमनाथश- रणमसि विष्णुपदपङ्कजोद्भवासि. प्रातरारभ्य पञ्चसप्ततिं वृक्षानसिचाम. वत्सस्य मरणेन तद्विषयकाः सर्वे मनोरथा मेऽध्वसन्. क्रीडार्थमुपवनमगमतां दम्पती तयोनिवृत्तयोरात्मनः करुण. वाती कथय. इयं बालिका दुःखवाता श्रुत्वामुहत, आश्वासयैनां उदकेन च सिञ्च. इमं ग्राममागच्छन्तौ भवन्निर्दिष्टे गहने वने नानापक्षिगणस- माकुलं महावटवृक्षं तमदर्शाव. उपाध्यायो देवानपूपुनदधुनातिथयो यथेष्टं भुञ्जताम्. अस्मिन्मण्डपे समाहतान् ब्राह्मणानहमजगणम्, पञ्च शतानि तेषां वर्तन्ते. एतेभ्यो ऽधुना दक्षिणां दातुमारभस्व.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 107 मचिन्तिता सरणिवरीयसेधिकारिणे नारुचदतः स तां निरा- स्थनीनां च स्वयं कल्पितां प्रावीवृतत्. किं यूयमवोचत पुनरपि कथयत नाहमवहितोऽभूवम्' We have drunk Soma and have become immortal. Devadatta has weighed this gold, make ornaments of it. The king of the Kalingas has besieged Pâtaliputra, but many of his soldiers have fallen out of the line and are look. ing for plunder. Ashtûvakra, coming from a place twelve coss off, is now tired. Give him food and drink. He has not been able to convince me that my belief in the existence of ghosts is unfounded. The minister has governed the country justly,' he is loved by all the people. He embraced his child and wept bitterly. Govinda looked for the lost book one whole day, but has not found it. We have cut off a branch of the Palas'a tree for making a sacrificial post. Have you not washed your hands yet? I have given a hot bath to my children. Hast thou not heated the water yet as I told you. The owner being dead they have caused the house to be pulled down and his clothes to be burned, VOCABULARY XIX. an a 39th adj. helpness. 37lTafi m. name of a person. अनुचर m. attendant, 378 with fat to repeal, to servant. abolish. By97 adj. immortal. I with fat. to set out. अर्थमन् m. a deity; one of the coa adv. bitterly (as apdead forefathers.. s plied to weeping). Hafea (past part. of 97 with SOUTIEF n. hot water. 379) attentive. Tu adj. doleful; lamentable. सकरुणं ·108 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. #fra past part. of the causal TE Ist and 10th conj. Paras, to of 4) planned. invented. quit. with galfaw, to convince. रुष्। with 84 to besiege. 27cash adj. desirous to go. uza n. गाईपत्य m. a sacred fire kept अपहार m.S } plunder. perpetually by an householder.ac 10th conj. to choose. afgrea adj.concerning him. azza m. a banian tree. aly 1st conj. átm. to spread. facie m. belief. 314 4th conj. Atm. to shine. an with 9 (in causal) to intro- 1st conj. Paras. to suck. duce ; to bring into practice. ¥with ez to draw out; to save. n. column of an army, a 57 Ist conj. Puras. to sound. phalanx wata adj. new. z 10th conj. Paras. to deceive, fara adj. lonely; without men. to defraud. fara adj. unfounded. सद् with आ and सम् to obtain, to meet with ; to find. gfratt m. retinue. सद् with उत् to cause to be 4OTT M. a kind of tree. (cnusal) destroyed, or to atzfage n. name of a town. FT (causal) (pull down. gtfrer f. name of a deity. FATO adj. occupied with ; full प्रेत, प्रेतनर of. भारक Fruit or fut f path; disposi- HOT m. name of a deity. tion or arrangement of thingsa hin 1st conj. Paras. to fall. Ffaa m. the sun. qU39 m. & temporary hall erected De 10th conj. Paras. to india on festive occasions. cate. Fate ». wish, desire. ET (causal) to give a bath to et or ATÉ 10th conj. Puras. fa adj. owner. to look for, to scarch. m. . mud. }m. ghost. LESSON XX. 1.--Sixth Tiriety. The sixth variety of the aorist is formed by adding to the root the forms of the third aorist of 37 with some changes, the 3T of 37 being cropped. These forms may be considered as the terminatilda 1!!ey are as follows:

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 109 सिषम् सिष्व सिष्म सी सिष्टम सिष्ट सीत् सिष्टाम् सिषुः To be able to commit them easily to memory the learner may regard them as made up of the imperfect forms of अस्,' with the STI dropped and FF prefixed; this latter necessitating the change of the following FT to F. Instead of HT, T should be taken to be the third person plural form, and F is not to be prefixed to the second and third person singular. 2. Roots ending in आ,* यम्, रम्, and नम्, take this variety. 3. This form or variety is Parasmaipadi only. II.--Seventh Variety. 1. This consists in adding to the root the forms of the second aorist of अस्, ' to be, the अ of अस being dropped. In other words add 37 to and append the general terminations of the Imperfect. These forms, considered as terminations, add on to the root:-- Paras. Atm. सम साव सावहि सामहि सतम् सन सथाः साथाम् सध्वम् सन् सताम् सन् सत साताम सन्त 2. This variety is both Âtm. and Paras. 3. Anitt roots ending in T, T, F, and and having , उ, ऋ, or ल, for their penultimate, have their aorist formed in this way. 4. The root T is an exception. 5. The roots स्पृश, मृश, कृष्, and श्लिष्, optionally take this variety. Roots ending in ए, ऐ, and ओ, are to be considered as roots ending in आ, as observed in Art. 13, Lesson XI. + See page 47, Note t. 30 10 * ·110 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT, . ग्लै. अग्लासिषम् अग्लासिष्य अग्लासिष्म अग्लासी अग्लासिष्टम अग्लासिष्ट अग्लासीत् अग्लासिष्टाम अग्लासिषुः लिह* अलिक्षम अलिक्षाव अलिक्षाम अलिक्षः अलिक्षतम् अलिक्षत अलिक्षत् अलिक्षताम् अलिक्ष अलिक्षि अलिक्षावहि अलिक्षामहि धलिक्षथा: अलिक्षाथाम अलिक्षध्वम् अलिक्षत अलिक्षाताम् भलिक्षन्त. नित्यकर्मानुष्ठानायास्नासीस्तच्छूद्रादीन्मा स्पृक्षः वेणुधमन्यामिमध्मासिषम्. तदस्मिन् प्रदीप्ते वन्हावाहुतीः प्रास्य. मो पुरोहित भवदाज्ञामनुसृत्य बटवेऽहं सावित्रीमुपादिक्षम् तद. धुनान्यत्करणीयं दर्शय. विवाहविधेरितिकर्तव्यतामत्रत्या ब्राह्मणा नाज्ञासिषुरतो मां त. सम्पादनायाहुन. अस्तमयासीद्रविस्तिमिरेणावृतं नमः. तत्किमद्यापि गा माधु. क्षत पयः. कृषीवला भूमिमकृक्षन परन्त्वाासु स्थितेप सूर्ये पर्जन्यो न वर्षति. मा वयं भ्रातरः परस्परं द्विक्षामेत्यस्माकं पितासनमरणो रि. क्थस्य समानांश्चतुरो भागानकरोत. महत्कार्यारम्भे देवो गुरुजनश्च वन्दितव्य इति वचनमनुरुध्य गृहदेवतां मातरं पितरमन्यांश्च वृद्धान्प्राणंसिष्म. 4 • Remember the Sandhi rules given in Lesson VII, ·> SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 111 कूषतडागादिनिर्माणाय महान्तो यत्ला युष्माभिः कृतास्ते कस्मि. पर्यवासासिषुः. इदं मधु किं नालिक्षः रुचिकरमेतत्. We brave mounted our horses and are now marching against the enem The flowers, brought yesterday, have now faded; throir them out and bring new ones. Having told us how Chandraketa and Lava fought with each other, and how Râma commanded them to be quiet, he has (now) ceased. I have not yet thought which would be better for me, the study of law or of medicine. Have you smelt the flower? It is very fragrant. The king has sat upon the throne and is consulting with his ministers. We have protected you so long from evil or injury; and you now act the traitor towards us; what could be more mournful ? Why hast thou abandoned an affectionate wife who vever did any thing you did not like? argi} VOCABULARY XX. 3778ra n. doing ; executing. 5013 pot. part. what is to be 28. m. sunset. done, # with a fo to march against. m. science of medicine. वैद्यक Ir gaat f. family deity. STIET f. the sixth lunar mansion. 1st conj. Purus. to fade. Byte a past part. of e, filled. आसनमरण adj. आसन्न near and 275a7 m. son of Lakshmana. CUT death. ET 4th conj. Parus. to act tie zipfa f. sacrificisl oblation. traitor, to injure. trandgat f. method, or the Fafot m. & n. darkness. way of doing any thing. o n. science of law. } ·112 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 4 1st conj. Paras. to rain. ìor m. a bamboo. 12. walf.a pipe. fangaa n. daily religious performance, genit. rain. y to protect. la past part. of 9 to ohine, with 7, shining brightly. HITT m. dirision. # 6th conj. Paras. with fa to think. to with fa Paras. to cease. frag n. property ; wealth. great adj. palatable. वन्दितव्य adj. pot. part. of वन्द fit to be bowed to. Sevil. पीडा) 4917 adj. equal. 979192 n. accomplishing. सावित्री f. the holy mantra or verse of the Rigvella, generally called Gâyatrî, and repeated by all Brâhmaṇas every day. gyfox adj. fragrant. ET 4th conj. Paras. to end, with aft & aya to end in, to result in. LESSON XXI. up in this way. 1. The most general varieties of the aorist are the fourth and the fifth. Any root that does not belong to any of the preceding ones takes the fourth or fifth form. In the same manner a root that takes one of the others optionally, or in the Parasmaipada only, has its other or Åtmanepada form made 2. The fifth differs from the fourth in prefixing the auginent to the terminations, and consequently it is the aorist of Set roots, and the fourth that of Anit roots. Y and F belong to the fifth form, though Anit; and I and roots ending in Te preceded by a conjunct consonant, when Åtmanepadi, and such as are optionally Şet, to either. Land 37551 take the fifth only. 3. The augment in the case of the root TE is long in all non-conjugational tenses except the Perfect. It is optionally so in the case of Land roots ending in (long) F in all tun-conjugational tenses, except the Perfect and Benedictive, Atm., and Aorist, Parasm, 4. The forms of the Imperfect of ET, to be, with the initial 3TT dropped are appended to the root as terminations.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 118 The third person plural has : instead of F. When in the fifth variety is prefixed, the E of the second and third person singular is dropped. preceded and followed by any consonant except a nasal or a semivowel is dropped; as अभिद् + स्त= अभेद + स्ताम् = अभैत्ताम्. अभित्त; FOURTA VARIETY, FIFTH VARIETY. Paras. Paras. इषम् इध इष्प सम् स्म सी स्तम् स्त सीत् स्ताम् सुः Atm. chur chuo इष्टम्' इष्ट इष्टाम् इषुः Atm. से सि स्वहि स्महि स्थाः साथाम् ध्वम् स्त साताम् सत इषि इष्टाः इष्वहि इष्महि इषाथाम् इध्वम् इवाताम् इषत इट Parasmaipada. FOURTH VARIETY. 5. In the Parasmaipada voice of the fourth variety the vowel of a root takes its Vriddhi substitute, as अभेत्सीत tran भिदः FIFTH VARIETY. . 6. In the Parasmaipada. fifth, the ending इ, उ, ऋ. ल, short or long, and the penultimate अ of roots ending in or af, and that of T and 25T take Vriddhi necessarily, as : -- लू -अलौ + इषम् = अलाविषम., चर-अचारिषम्, फल,-अफालिषम्. 7. The 37, if not prosodially long, of roots having for. initial consonant, and ending in any consonant except arx ल, has Vriddhi optionally, as गद-अगदीत् or अगादीत. 108bs* ·114 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 8. Ereception:-Roots ending in हु, म, य; and क्षण, श्वस, जाए, कट, लग, हस, श्वि, and some others do not take Vșiddhi substitute, as अक्रमीत, from क्रम. 9. The penultimate इ, उ, ऋ,ल, take their Guna in the fifth form, as सिध्-असेभोत्, शुच- अशोचीत्, कृत-भकर्तीत. Atmanepada. FIFTH VARIETY. 10. In the Atrmanepada, the ending or the penultimate short vowel takes its Guņa substitute in the fifth variety, as लू-अलविष्ट, मुद-अमोदिष्ट. FOURTH VARIETY. 11. In the fourth, the enlling , or 3, short or long, takes Guņa, while the ending and the penultimate short remain unchanged, as नी-अनेष्ट, सु-असोष्ट, भू-अभृषत 3rd pers. pl. भिद-अभित्त. 12. After a short vowel the # of FT and FT: is dropped, as हु-अहृत. 13. In the Atmanepada दा, धा, and *such roots as assume those forms in non-conjugational tenses, and FSTT substitute s' for the final आ, and this s does not take Guna; as अदित, अदिषाताम. 14. सृज and दृश change the r to when followed by a strong termination beginning with a hard consonant (see 16, Lesson XI.), and Anit roots having te for their penultimate change it to T, optionally, in the above circumstances; सृज-अस्राक्षम, अद्राक्षम् from देश-(द्रक्ष्यति, future), अम्रा- प्सीत् or असाप्सीत् from सृप. 15. The third person singular of the aorist of पद् is BFTIFE, i.e. it is made up by using the termination instead of Fr. Before this, the ending vowel and the penultimate ver this expression is used, always understand 1 and conj.' to cut," and 1st conj. 'to purify,' to be excepted.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 115 . take Vriddhi, and any other short penultimate takes Guņa. The root जन् does not change its vowel. दीप, जन्, बुध, पूर्, ताय and प्याय् substitute this s for स्त optionally. 16. The passive forms of non-conjugational tenses are made up simply by appending Åtmanepada terminations to the prepared base. In the passive 'of the aorist all roots take s for the third person singular, instead of स्त. . अमार्षम् अभार्षीः अमार्षीत् अभृषि अभृथाः अभृत अलाविषम् अलावी अलावीत् अलविषि अलविष्ठा अलविष्ट अभाल अमाष्टम् अमाष्टम अभृष्यहि अभृषाधाम अभृषाताम् अलाविष्व अलाविष्टम अलाविष्टाम् अलविष्वहि अलविषाथाम अलविषाताम अभाष्य अमार्ट अभाएः अभृष्यहि अभृङ्कम अभृषत अलाविष्म अलाविष्ट अलाविषुः अलविष्महि अलविध्वम् अलविषत ओदनं शाकांश्च सूदा अपाक्षुरतोऽधुना सर्वान ब्राह्मणान भोजय. कनिष्ठं पुत्रमहमब्रवं पुत्रक कुसुमपुरं गत्वा तत्रैकस्मिनगृहे मया निक्षिप्नं धनमास्ते नगृहाण. सोऽगच्छन्; निवृत्त्य च माम- ब्रवीत; तात भ्रातरो मे तत्रागत्यास्मभ्यमेतद्धनं पितादादिति वदन्तः सर्वमेव तदादिषत. यत्त्वं सत्यमवादीस्तत्तुभ्यमहमेतद्भवां शतं ददामि. त्वमात्मनः पूर्वभार्यामत्याक्षीरन्यां च पर्यणेषोरिति यदश्रोषं तक्किं सत्यम.

·116
SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT.
मुग्धाकृतिरतोव प्रियश्चावयोः शिशुरमृतेति शोकविकलोऽहं
भार्या च मे. परंतु किं वृथाशोकेन सत्यमेव तद्यकविराह
कश्चैकान्तं सुखमुपगतो दुःखमेकान्ततो वा
नोचैर्गच्छत्युपरि चू दशा चक्रनेमिक्रमेण ।
ऋषयो वै सरस्वत्या सत्रमासत. ते कवषमैलूषं सोमाद.
नयन्, दास्याः पुत्रः कितवोब्राह्मणः कथं नो मध्ये दीक्षिष्टेति.
साचिव्ये मामेवान्यान्सर्वाननादृत्य राजा यौक्षोदतो भियुक्तेन
मनसा मया कार्यमनुष्ठेयम.
अस्मिन् क्षेत्रे विपुलं धान्यमवाप्सम
अङ्गीकृतं महत्कार्य पारयितुमक्षमा वयमुदस्राम.
अखिला मनोरथा मेडफालिपुरतोऽहं सुखमस्वाप्सम, न
किञ्चिदवेर्दिषं.
किं नाद्यायमिरथमद्राष्ट. प्रत्यहं त्रिरनेन मार्गेण स नीयते.
मुक्तकेशों मां दृष्ट्वा दुर्योधनस्य भार्या भानुमत्यहसीत्तन्मे दहनि
देहमित्यब्रवीद्भीमं द्रौपदी.
असमर्थोऽयमर्जुनः कौरवैः सह योद्धमतो संग्रामान्यवतिष्टेनि
जना ब्यु
.
भार्या में पुत्रमसविष्टातो जातकर्मादिसंस्काराणां संभार.न् ।
करोमि.
अधुनैव सोनागत्यायं पुरुषः सुविनीतोऽयं दुर्विनीत इति बहु
प्रालापीत मैवं पुनः प्रलपीदित्येकदा तं भृशं ताडय.
अस्माभिराज्ञप्तः पौराणिकः पुराणकथाः कथयितुमारब्ध,
नदेहि श्रोतुम.
परिचारक मे दन्दशूको दाहोत्तत्त्वरस्व भिषजं गत्वौषधमा-
नय.
इयन्नं कालमुदामं कुर्वन्नपि सुखं नालप्सि तस्मानियतिर्बली-
यसी.

·, SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 117 महता प्रयत्नेन तेन संचितं धनमहातस्मात्यायोऽसि गह- गीयचरितोऽसि. एतं ह वा ऐन्द्रं महाभिषेकं वासिष्ठः सात्यहव्योऽत्यरातये जाननपये प्रोवाच तस्मादत्यराति नन्तपिरराजा सन् विद्यया, । समन्तं सर्वतः पृथिवों जयन् परीयाय. स होवाच वासिष्ठः सात्यहव्योषी समन्तं सर्वतः पृथिवीं, महन्मा गमयेति. स होवाचात्यरातिजीनन्तपियंदा ब्राह्मणोत्तरकुरूजययमथ त्वमु हैव पृथिव्यै* राजा स्याः सेनापतिरेव तेऽहं स्यामिति, स होवाच वासिष्ठः सात्यहव्यो देवक्षेत्रं वै तन वै तन्मयों जेतुमर्हत्यदक्षो वै म आज इदं दद इति. ततो हात्यराति जाननपिमातवीर्य निःशुक्रममित्रतपनः शुष्मिणः शैल्यो राजा जघान. The enemies have burned twenty villages, and are now marching against the capital. The birds confined in the cage have all flown away. The friends, whom I expected so long, are come, and have just alighted from their carriages. We have lopped off the branches of the flower-trees in the garden. They have dug many canals communicating with the river Sindhu for agricultural purposes. When he said (just now) he could be a Sanscrit Pandita in ten days, I smiled. Yajnadatta has recently performed his son's Upanayana ceremony (the investiture of the sacred thread). He gave much Dakshiņå to Brâhmaņas on that occasion. It was but just now that they remembered they had sent a man to call Govinda for aid. * Dative used in the sense of the Genitive. + दह here takes the seventh form, as it should by the general rules. # In the Vedic dialect, a preposition need not be immediately prefixed tu a Verb : several words may intervene.

·118 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. Do not be afraid, it is not a cobra that you see before you, but a rope. 3 you have. The English have killed the ring-leaders and re-conquered the country. From his constantly sitting at home and not doing any. thing, have resulted poverty, and many painful diseases. Have you made the ornaments that I told you to make? Show them to me if The king's surveyors have not yet measured the whole land. We have torn all those papers, now that they are of no use. He has pounded the medicine, emptied the vessel, put that powder into it, pouredawater, and placed it on the fire. They have gratified the wishes of their friends and relations in this country, and are now going home. He has abandoned all worldly affairs, and has now become a recluse. We have not yet accepted the money they gave us yesterday. They have served their king faithfully. The traders have bought all the cotton in the market, and sent it off to England. The monkeys have broken the roof of the house. The brothers have divided their ancestral property. I have endured all the taunts of the people calmly, and borne the responsibility (yoke or weight) of governing uninterruptedly. VOCABULARY XXI. }ado 1978 adj. unable. afgrym fire-carriage ; rail. way carriage. pigia m. name of a Kshatriya. अनन्यपरायणम् ado. faithfully. भक्तया 3199 poi. part. from Et with अनु, what is to be executed. mfa 74 adv. uninterruptedly.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 119 } a roof. mos m. an enemy. gråata adj. rade. 2757 adj. commanded. 6th conj. Paras. with 341 to 277 adj. from 347 and 1 past pay respect to, to regard. part. of zi to give, taken Tea n. the land of the gods. away. GIT m. cobra. भास् with , to hold a sacri- fagfeta adj. confined. ficial session; to perform & fagra f. destiny. succession of sacrifices. fa: adj. powerless. Snegra: m. pl. name of a a: adv. down, below. country beyond the Himâ fa f. circumference of a wheel. layas (probably the original zen. seat of the Aryas). दिस् m. oft adv. above. gaan n. paper. एकान्तं fgegaae adj. ancestral. ado. invariably. एकान्ततः 5181977 adj. painful. m. son of Ilúshâ. dirifuger m. one who reads and mity n. a medicinal drug. explains the Purâņas. 90 m. name of a person. Per Ist conj. Paras. to crown faaa m, a rogue. with success. For f. a canal. H* Ist conj. Paras. & Atm. to GRGT n. name of a town. divide. fin, agricultural purpose. #507, to break. Twith fa, to accept. भानुमतीf. wife of Duryodhana araan n. birth-ceremony. the eldest son of Dbſitarásh- जानन्तपि. m. a descendant of tra. Janantapa. **1971 m. a surveyor. 797 m. an oppressor. Han n. lustre ; greatness. m. cotton. 877 n. greatness, power. ey 4th conj. Paras. to gratify #T 3rd conj. Atm, to measure. (as a wish). at f. having hair disorwith ara to alight. dered or dishevelled. 7efa adj. of a lovely form or ** m. a snake. shape. * 1st conj. Paras. to bite. 990 m. proper name. TNT f. state, To 1st conj. Paras. to burn. 7778197 f. capital city. fran. poverty. राज्यधुरा f. responsibility of a lst conj. Atm. to hallow, governing (from yoke). and thus fit one's self for fre 7th conj. Paras. & Atm. to performing a sacrifice. empty. > ·120 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 7q lst conj. Paras. with g to preferinta adj. overcome with speak, to prattle. वासिष्ठ m. a descendant of Vasishtha. with qfr to become a recluse. 16 m. vegetable. figo aoj. powerful. a n. name of a king. sorrow. n. a sacrificial session. Finalf. the name of a river. Birga n. ministry. HIF2 m. name of a priest. fe with fa to pour. fazla adj. modest. LESSON XXII. Part I. f FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE AND CONDITIONAL. 1..FIRST FUTURE, 1. To the root should be added the suffix T, before which the final vowel or the penultimate short takes Guņa. Nominative forms of the noun thus made up are to be considered as the forms of the third person ; and in the first and second persons, the corresponding forms of the Parasnaipada present tense of # should be appended to the nominative singular. In the case of Atmanepada, the Atmanepada forms of ST should be added. 2. To the saffix , is to be prefixed after Set roots, and optionally after those that are optionally Set. Anit roots, vt course, do 110t admit it. The roots 5, 6, 7, 6, and Firet admit of T optionally before I When He undergoes the changes mentioned in II. III. and IV. Lessou VII., its 37 is replaced by 327, सोढा, सोढारी &c. Parasnaigada. 3. ETAFETT IFETITT: भवितास्मः भवितासि भवितास्थः भवितास्थ HETTI भवितारी भविवारः Átmanepada 4. is the first person singular, and second person plural, present teuse, of the Atmanepada of 38. as ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSÖRIT. 121 5. मोदिताहे मोदितास्वहे मोदितास्महे मोदितासे मोदितासाथे मोदिताध्वे मोदिता मोदितारी मोदितारः II.-SECOND FUTURE. 1. The terminations of this tense are made up by prefixing Ft to those of the present. The augment is to be prefixed to FT, or not, or optionally according to the nature of the root. Before the terminations, the final vowel, and the penultimate short, take Guna. 2. After गम् Paras., हन् and roots ending in ऋ, इ is to be prefixed to FT in this tense, and the conditional, though these roots are Anit. 3. कृप, वृत्, वृध, शृथ्, and स्यन्द are optionally Parasmaipadi in the second future, and when so, the FT does not take as appended to them. This holds in the case of u in the 1st Future also. लपस्यावहे लप्स्यामहे लप्स्यसे लप्स्येथे लप्स्यध्वे लप्स्यते लप्स्येते लप्स्यन्ते 4. लप्स्ये भविष्यामि भविष्याव: भविष्यामः भविष्यसि भविष्यथ: भविष्यथ भविष्यति भविष्यतः भविष्यन्ति III.-CONDITIONAL 1. In the conditional, the terminations of the Imperfect are appended to FT, instead of those of the Present. The temporal augment is to be prefixed to the root; in other respects the forms are exactly like those of the second future. 2. अलप्स्ये अलप्स्यावहि अलप्स्यामहि अलप्स्यथाः अलप्स्येथाम् अलप्स्यध्वम् अलप्स्यत अलप्स्येताम् अलप्स्यन्त 11 sbs

·122
SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT.
अभविष्यम् अभविष्याव अभविष्याम
अभविष्यः अभविष्यतम् अभविष्यत
अभविष्यत् अभविष्यताम् अभविष्यन्
As in the case of.other non-conjugational tenses, the
passive of these three tenses is formed by appending the
Atmanepada termimations to the root.
b. The first future expresses remote future time. The
second future is far more generally used than the first. The
conditional is used in those conditional sentences in which the
non-performance of the action is implied. It expresses both
future and past times. In the latter particular, it resembles
the English pluperfect conditional.
हरिद्वारं गमिष्यामि तत्र च गङ्गोमं हिमाचलं च द्रक्ष्यामि
सर्वासां देवतानां पूजां च विधाय स्वग्राम प्रति निवामि.
यद्यत्ते हितकर तत्सर्व कर्नु यतिष्ये.
स्वामिनादिष्टोऽपि पुष्पाणि नानयसि यदानपीनवेति स प्रक्ष्यति
तदा किं प्रतिवक्ष्यसि.
अस्माकं मित्रं हिरण्यको नाम मूषकराजो गण्डकीतीरे
चित्रवने निवसति सोऽस्माकं पाशांश्छेत्स्यति.
यदि मे बाणपथमायास्यस्यसंशयं मरिष्यसि.
सुवृष्टिश्चेदभविष्यत्तदा सुभिक्षमभविष्यत्.
यदि स धर्ममत्यक्ष्यदुःखभाक्समवर्तिष्यत.
कुतुमपुर एकस्मिन् गृहे शत्रुणा पातितमग्निं यदि कृष्णवर्मा
न निरवापयिष्यत्तदा सर्वमेव नगरमग्निरधक्ष्यत्.
पुटकरण भ्रात्रा द्यूते जितो नलो राज्यात्परिभ्रष्टो दमयन्त्या
सह वनमियाय, तत्रापि कलिना बहुविधैश्छलैः पीडितो सुप्तां
दमयनीमुत्सृज्यैकस्मिन् स्थले जगाम. गच्छश्च महान्तं दावं
ददर्श. तन्मध्ये कर्कोटको नाम नाग आसीत्. तं स राजा

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT, 128 अमेमध्यादुद्धत्य कानिचित्पदानि निनाय. दशमे पदे कर्कोटको नलमदशत. तेन नैषधस्य स्वीयं रूपमन्तरधीयत. आत्मानं विकृतं दृष्ट्वा स राजा विस्मितस्तस्थी. ततः कर्कोटको नागः सान्त्वयन नलमब्रवीत् । मया तेऽन्तर्हितं रूपं न त्वां वितुर्जना इति ।। यत्कृते चासि निकृतो दुःखेन महता नल । विषेण स मदीयेन त्वयि दुःखं निवत्स्यति ।। विषेण संवृतैर्गात्रैर्यावत्त्वां न विमोक्ष्यति । तावत्त्वयि महाराज दुःखं वै स निवत्स्यति ॥ अनागा येन विकृतस्त्वपनों जनाधिप । क्रोधादसूययित्वा तं रक्षा मे भवतः कृता ।। न ते भयं महावीर दंष्ट्रिभ्यः शत्रुनोपि वा ।, ब्रह्मर्षिभ्वश्च भविता मत्प्रसादान्नराधिप ।। राजन विषनिमित्ता च न ते पीडा भविष्यति । संग्रामेषु च राजेन्द्र शश्वज्जयमवाप्स्यसि ।। गच्छ राजनितः सूतो बाहुकोऽहमिति ब्रुवन् । समीपमृतुपर्णस्य स हि चैवाक्षनैपुणः ।। अयोध्या नगरी रभ्यामद्य निषधेश्वर । स तेक्षहदयं दाता राजाश्वदयेन वै ।। इक्ष्वाकुकुलजः श्रीमान मित्रं चैव भविष्यति । भविष्यसि यदाक्षज्ञः श्रेयसा योक्ष्यसे तदा ।। समेष्यसि च दरित्वं मा स्म शोके मनः कृथाः राज्येन तनयाभ्यां च सत्यमेतद्ववीमि ते ।। स्वरूपं च यदा द्रष्टुमिच्छेयास्त्वं नराधिप । संस्मर्तव्यस्तदा तेऽहं वासश्चेदं निवासयेः ।। अनेन वाससा च्छन्नः स्वरूपं प्रतिपत्स्यसे। इत्युक्त्वा प्रददौ तस्मै दिव्यं वासोयुगं तदा ।। एवं नलं च संदिश्य वासो दत्वा च कौरव । नागराजस्ततो रास्तत्रैवान्तरधीयत ॥

·12 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. मधुकर मदिराक्ष्याः शंस तस्याः प्रवृत्तिं वरतनुरथवासौ नैव दृष्टा त्वया मे। यदि सुरभिमवाप्स्यस्तन्मुखोच्यासगन्धं तव रतिरभविष्यत्पुण्डरीके किमस्मिन् ।। अकरिष्यदसौ* पापमनिनिष्करुणैव सा । मा भविष्यमहं तत्र यदि तत्परिपन्थिनी॥ . If I do not see Nala to-day, I will enter or throw myself into a fire, and perish. The king does not tell me the object of his visit. Well, I shall know it in the end. Sudera, go to Rituparņa, and tell him “Damayanti is going to (will) institute a new Svayamvara; many princes and kings go there, and it will come off to-morrow." “If you wish, go to Kundinapura in a single day; for as soon as the sun rises she will choose a second husband.” Damayantî gave much wealth to Parnada, and said, “I will give you more when Nala comes. Tlou hast done mucli for me; none else will do so much; for now, as a consequence of your efforts, I shall soon be united to my husband." Oh Bâhuka! thou shouldst not deceive me; how will these weak lorses bear me to Kundinapura in a single day? We will now mount our horses and run swiftly. Båhuka said to the king, " Thou hast told me the number of leaves and fruits on this tree. Well, I will fell it in your presence, and count the leaves." I will not touch you because you eat with Chândalas. I do not know when he will begin to construct a house to lives in. Had Yajuadatta made a bow to him when he entered the house, he would not have considered him a conceited fellow. * Said of a wicked woman who wanted to kill a young maid out of spite for hier husband, but was presented by a holy dame, who is the speaker.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 125 Had he gone into the presence of his enemy unguarded, the enemy would have killed him. Had the cobra bitten him at the time, and had there been nobody to get medicine, Devadatta would certainly have died. Thou wilt, by my blessing, enjoy supreme power in this, world, and get a son possessing all thy virtues; please or keep contented all your subjects. Part II. I.-BENEDICTIVE MOOD. 1. The Parasmaipada terminations of this mood are made up by adding it to those of the imperfect. The 3rd pers. pl. is ITE: ; and the 7 of atą is dropped before the a and of the 3rd and 2nd pers. sing. 2. To the terminations of the Atmanepada potential and to the a and occurring in them prefix . These will be the terminations of the Atmanepada Benedictive. 3. The Parasmaipada terminations are weak, and the Atmanepada strong Rules regarding the Parasmaipadn forms. 4. Roots ending in # change it to fc; as figna, fagiott le. from a 5. # preceded by a conjunct consonant is changed to its Guņa ; as Freira, ETH &c. from . 6. Art. 4 Lesson XII. holds good this case; as उचात, उच्चा- ETA &c. from a 7. er and wi, and other roots assuming these forms, AT, UT, JT, 91, FT, and T, change their final vowel to t; as 2917, wala &c. 8. Other roots ending in 3 when preceded by a conjunct consonant, change their 371 to T optionally; as regra, Tatap &c. from res 9. A final or = is lengthened ; as 511912, 191914 &c. from जी, सूयात्, स्तूयास्ताम् &c. from स्तु. 10. Final F (long) is changed to &T and, when preceded by a labial or a, to $T (see Art. 8, page 6). 11 sbs* ·128 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT, क्रियासम् क्रियास्म Atmanepada forms. 11. The terminations take after Set roots and optionally after those that are optionally Set. 12. Roots ending in * (long), and in * (short) preceded by a conjunct consonant, and E, admit of optionally; as aftone, Tate (see below) from वृ, स्तरिषोष्ट, स्तुषोष्ट from स्तु. 13. Final For # and the penultimate vowel do not undergo their Guna substitutes when the terminations do not take दू; हृषीष्ट from ह, स्वरिषीष्ट, स्तो!ष्ट, from सृ, सुक्षीष्ट, from मुच. कृ Paras. क्रियास्व क्रिया: क्रियास्तम् क्रियास्त क्रियात् क्रियास्ताम् क्रियासुः Atm. कृषीय कृषीवहि कृषीमहि कृषीयास्थाम् कृषीध्वम् कृषीष्ट कृषोयास्ताम् कृषोरम. 0. Explain the following forms, referring to the several rules applicable in each case! दिश्यात्, दिक्षोष्ट, रुध्यात्, रत्मोष्ट, उच्यात, स्मीन, स्तात , नीयात्, नेपोष्ट देयात, दामोष्ट, धाक्षोष्ट, गाहिषीष्ट ; प्रेयात् घायात ; तीर्थात्, पूर्यात्, उह्यात, वक्षोर, मादिषीट, टप्सीष्ट, लप्सीट, धुक्षीट, दुह्यात. i. Give the Benedictive forms of the following roots :- ह, इ. वप, यज्, सह, नह, रुह , लिङ्, बन्ध, झा, हा, भिद्, भू, वृत्, रच, सेा, स्तु, रु, भास्. II.-PASSIVE. In additiou to the Rules given in the First Book and in some lessons of this, the student should commit to memory the following :- 1. य added to roots in the conjugational tenses is weak. Arts. 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, in the above hold good in the case of this य, i.e. in conjugational tenses. 3. The roots enumerated in Art. 7 in the above, change their imal rowel to ई before य. कृषीछाः ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 127 4. The passive forms of the First and Second Future, Fourth Aorist, and Benedictive of roots ending in a vowel, and of 7, T, and are optionally made up by changing the vowel to its Driddhi,* and appending the Atmanepada terminations of those tenses and moods with prefixed to them. इof हन् is changed to E, and q is added to roots ending in api in these optional forms." Explain the following: स्तयते, स्नीयते, नीय, पूर्ये, उहते, अवसीयते, भाविष्यते, धानिष्यते, भविष्यते, दर्मिष्यते, द्रक्ष्यते, हारिष्यते, नायिष्यते, नेष्यते, स्थास्यते, हरिष्यते, स्थायिष्यते, 37291faarata, अदृषत, Bygtua. Write down the passive forms of the second future 'and aorist of roots given in question b in the above, and of the present and imperfect of the following: गृ, वप्, यज्ञ, दे, ह. कृ, स, स्मृ, व्यच. VOCABULARY XXII. the STT m. dice used in gambling. Tent m. the progenitor of the 3797779 n. the secret of managsolar race of kings. ing dice. a n. ruler. 34a8adj. not deserving. उच्छास m. breathing, sighing. 37 Tue adj. innocent, not guilty. 99 m. source ; springing up. 3ftfea adj. unguarded. Garza m. the name of a serpent. f end; (in the arm. the name of dice personi- अवसान 2. उदm. locative) in fied ; the principle of evil. event or eventually. faigta m. fellow. 23ca n. the secret of manag- sifugayt n. name of a town. ing horses: कुलज adj. (कुल n. family and ज 34 at to wish ill to, to bear from, 77, produced) born in malice to. a family; of the race of. Berga adv. undoubtedly. es with fa to injure, to wrong. a ind. for, on account of. गण्डकी f. name of river.' STTTT n. visit. J78 111. perfume, smell. någa n. a blessing. f997 1. name of a forest. * This does not apply to ER. * Thi a nominal verb, formed from 3721 by dropping the final vowel and adding 372, as in the 10th Conjugation, > field" } adj. conceited. а ·128 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. to. Po n. fraud. FT with Face to construct. ETT m. a forest conflagration, a 7977 m. a mouse. forest. got n. pair, couple. žrta m an animal haring sharp 35 with FA to be united to. teeth ; a snake. 755 with 3 (caus.) to pleas fra adj. celestial, benutiful. to keep contented. fafari n. cause, reason, object. tra f. love. नैपुण्य n. skill. POTET with stand ay m. king of a country fa 25 10th Sto deceive. named Nishadha. conj. Paras. पत. uith H and ge with sfa to answer. for for fat, to make a bow a caus. with fa, to put on नम् with garment, to dress. CITÀ E N. at caus. with fat to extinguish आधिपत्य . supreme power. 2157 n. the name of Nala dis- HIFITT N. guised as a charioteer. पद with प्रति to attain, with से भट् (caus. शातय्) to fell. to happen, to come off. & aclv. from an enemy afcafo aq m. one who stands in * adv. perpetually. the way or obstructs. Fierata adj. to be remembered. afrae past part of lst conj. etf. number. Atm. with oft, deprived of, a m. proper name. fallen, depraved. EFHET n. abundance of food. quire m. proper name. En m. charioteer. afaa (past part. of the causal at with 371 to institute. of 476) thrown. EfTETT n. name of a holy place 987 m. proper name, at the foot of the Himalayas. FR19 adr. in one's presence. featze m. Himalaya. fETV277 01. name of a mouse. LESSON XXIII. XXIII. 7 DESIDERATIVES. 1. ". The root is reduplicated according to the general rules given in Lesson IX.; and then the termination Ħ appended to it. Iu the conjugational tenses 37 is added to Ę. 1. The 37 in the reduplicated syllable is changed to 7.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 129 १ 6. स्मि, पू धू, वृ Átm. 2. To this the augment T is to be prefixed or not according as the root is Set or Anit, subject to the following exceptions : a. ग्रह, गुड्, and roots ending in ऊ long, do not admit of है ; as जिघृक्षति, बभूषति- ऋ, दृ Átm. Atom. अज, प्रच्छ, and अश admit of 53; as पिपृच्छिषति, दिधरिषति, &c. Roots ending in ऋ and इव, वृitm. 8. Parius. दम्भ, श्रि, स्वृ, यु, भृ, ज्ञप्, take s optionally ; as दुघुपति or दिदेविषति, from दिव्, शिश्रीपति or शिश्रयिषति from श्रि, &c. 3. * The general rule of Gurc should be applied subject to the following exceptions:- a. Roots ending in इ, उ, and ऋ (all of them short or long) or having these vowels for their penultimates do not admit of Gzira when the U to be appended to them does not take the augment; as बुभूषति, निनीषति- b. रुद्, विद्, and मुष do not take Gurra. Roots having 3 or 5 short for their penultimate, and beginning with any consonant and ending with any except I and admit of Guza optionally, when the स् takes the augment, as रुरुदि. पति, मुमुदिषते or मुमोदिषते, &c. 4. Roots ending in a vowel lengthen it when the स् is unaugmented ; as जिगीषति from जि 'to conquer.' 5. a. ग्रह, स्वप्, and प्रच्छ change the ' and c to and उ;as सुषुप्सति. b. The T of IT is changed to in the reduplicateu! syllable. The vowel of the following roots, is changed to 'and the roots are not reduplicated :- मि, मा, दा, धा, and other roots assuming the forms of दा and धा, र, ल, शक, पत्, पद्. Of these, those ending in a vowel add a T. * See Art. 6 page 8. c.

·130 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. d. आप and ज्ञL have ईप्सति and जीप्सति. २. दम्भ has three forms, धिप्सति, eficara, FETFITTIT. तन* has also three forms, तितांसति, तितंसति, तितनिषति. f. The 3T of FT is changed to T after the reduplicated spilable, the of FE to T, and the off optionally to . 0. The rule in Art. 8 page 6 should be observed. 7. Desideratives may be formed from the causal base, or roots of the tenth conjugation, according to the general rules. A root in its desiderative form takes the same terminations (Parasmaipada, Atmanepada, or both) that it does in the primitive. 2. The desideratives of TT, BT, FT, and IT are Âtmanepadi. Ess. feraiera from , wishes or is about to do; by 11,1., 2 a, 3 (1, 4, 6, and 8 a. quafe from it, wishes or is about to become; by 1 a, 2 at, išll, and 8 c faqata from Te, wishes or is about to take; by 1 a, l, :24, öll, and 8 (l; and by II. VI. and VII., Less. VII. विद्योतिषने or दिद्युतिषते, wishes or is about to shine; by l', : 7,5li, and 8 a. faftina or- wishes or is about to break; by 1 a, 3 , and 80. a. By affixing to the desiderative form, nouns siguifying the 'wisher' are formed. These nouns govern an C'C'11-2tive, as 1. By iuffixing 34T, abstract nouns are formed; as FTFIFT desire of knowledge, curiosity. ? ferantg: FTH ik নন and पत् are uptionally set in the case of this - ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 131 , प्रारिप्सितस्य ग्रन्थस्याविघ्नपरिसमाप्तय इष्टदेवतां स्तौति- स्वयंवरकाले सीतां लिप्सवो रावणादयो बहवो राजानी विदेहाञ्जग्मुः. किन्तु रुद्रधनुर्नमयितुमशक्ताः सर्वे भग्नाशा बभूवुः- अभितापसंपदमथोष्णसांच- निजतेजसामसहमान इव । पयसि प्रपित्सुरपराम्बुनिधे- रधिरोदुमस्तगिरिमभ्यपतत् ॥ ब्रह्मतत्त्वं जिज्ञासमानः कश्चिदाचार्यमुपेत्याध्यापय भो ब्रह्मे- त्युवाच. तस्यां सभायामेव दुर्योधनं ,गदाघातेन जिघांसुभीमसेनो युधिष्ठिरेण निवारितः थियक्षमाणेनाहूतः पार्थनाथ द्विषन्मुरम् । अभिचैद्यं प्रतिष्ठासुरासीकार्यद्वयाकुलः || प्रासादतलमारुरुक्षुः सोपानपति पदं निधत्ते. यूरोपीयवैभवं दिदृक्षमाणाः प्रनिसंवत्सरं कतिचिद्रनख ण्डीया अङ्ग्लभूम्यादिदेशाननिनौकाभिर्गच्छन्ति. ब्राह्मणो बुभूयू राजधिविश्वामित्र उमं तपश्चक्रे. प्रभूतवर्षणादस्या नद्याः कूलं पिपतिषति. तदस्मिन्मा पदं निधेहि सूर्यवंशसंभवानां राज्ञां यशो जिगासुः कालिदास आह:- क सूर्यप्रभवो वंशः क्व चाल्पविषया मतिः । तितीपर्दस्तर मोहादुडुपेनस्म सागरम् ।। भूरिधनमादित्सुना बले नानुगम्यमानः शरदारम्भे दिगना जिगीबू रघुरयोध्यायाः प्रतस्थे. बटुमुपनिनीखुराचार्यः स्वाधिकारसिद्धये कृच्छत्रयं कुर्यात्. राजगृह प्रविविक्षुनाषकुमारको हठानिःसारितो दुविनीते. रिपाले आत्मनः कौशलं दिदर्शयिषन्त्यङ्गना महान्तं कालमनृत्यत्- a ·132 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. * The dog is about to die ; * do not disturb him. Fishing to benıl the branch of the tree, he raised his hand. A very violent storm arose, the sun was invisible, and it appeared as if the wind was going to tear up all trees by the roots, and to destroy all houses. Vis'râmitra practised austerities for a thousand years, till his whole frame, instinct with the subtle principle of Brahma, became refulgent, and he appeared to be about to burn the whole universe by his extraordinary splendour. Having seen his own kinsmen prepared (desirous) to fight with him, his face became pale. This child is inclined to sleep; put him into the cradle, and rock him to sleep. There is a man waiting at the door who wants to speak to you on matters of great importance. He who wishes to be free from the trammels of the world (life) should go to a philosopher, be acquainted with Brahma, and meditate on it. Those who wish to introduce the system of widow marriages should proceed at once to the task; the time for discussion is gone. In that battle there was a soldier, who, being wounded, was afflicted with a raging thirst (desire to drinli). Dhrishtaketu was about to strike a Rishi with his sword, mistaking him for his enemy, when I caught hold of his hand. I went to Kâs î intending (desiring) to bathe in the holy waters of the Ganges, and to live thero for two years to study Sânkhya philosophy. The two girls went into the garden intending (desiring) to gather flowers. The self-existent God, desirous to create the world, appeared on the surface of the waters, which covered the whole spacc. The parrot that was confined in the cage this morning is about to jly artily. * Use desiderative forms for the expressions printed in Italics.

·133 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 2 VOCABULARY XXIII. a penances, was Tiara 10th conj. } to . BER adj. invisible. o with जर्ध्वम् to raise. arca adj. extraordinary. a caus. with उत् afwaTT m. fitness to perform कृच्छ्रजय 1. (कृच्छ्र. any ceremony. and go three) three penances. अपराम्बुनिधि m. (अपर other, ग्रह with सम् to store. i. e. western, and afara wataz m. n. f. a philosopher. ocean) the western ocean. fton m. the end of directions ; syfweg adv. (from em. the countries in all directions, king of Chedi, who Kțishna's enemy) towards आन्दोलन to rock. Chaidya. द्वारपाल m. Hata m. most violent heat. à porter, a doorkeeper. अर्दित } past part. aflicted. 17 with 59, to perform the cere- आत mony of the "investiture of 37 Eyfaret f. not comprehenthe sacred thread. sivè, whose range is small. afe f. a line, row. afay adj. without obstacle. Befoft m. the western moun पत् with अभि to jump towaris. tain, on which the sun, moon, gfrustfa f. end, accomplishand stars are supposed to set. ment. ser m. a religious teacher 9557 I. & 1. l cage. who invests the student with FEUG (lj. violent. the sacred thread, and in- T f. a craille. structs him in the Vedas. BT18 f. hope. पाण्डु gegaat f. tutelar (desired) faqur deity. T adj. raging, severe. 978777 n. restraint, निगड trammels. EG9 m. & n. a raft, canoe. 978 in, relation. दीप्त tra Esotere m. the sun. n. an army. mafea pron. several. Ho past part, of 7551 to des. ada adj. distracted by troy ; blown up, destroyed. having two things to do at aft udj. much. one time. महत्व n. importance. गुरुत्व 12 sbs } adj. pale. az 11. a boy. fetters. उत्तजिता }adjinstinct with. on. bank.

·13+ SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. pic m. the name of an enemy of Vishņu or Krishņa. 8 10th conj. with a to extirpate, to tear up by the roots. alf in. folly, stupidity. 27919 adj. pertaining te the continent of Europe. TF, with fy to ascend. a su 1. rain-fall, raining. विभ्राजमान उज्ज्वल faare m. discussion & 10th conj. with ff to oppose, to dissuade from. za with 5 (causal) to introduce. Ha m. birth. wie n. a system of philosophy. € (caus.) with faç to drive away, to expel. fefe f. accomplishment. ndag n. the family of the sun, the solar race. wigia n. stairs, steps. porn adv. by violence. } adj. refulgent. LESSON XXIV. 1. After Set roots the augment is to be prefixed to the go of the infinitive of purposc, and not after Anit ones, and optionally after those that are both Set and Anit. 2. a. The T of the past participle is to be considered as a weak termination, and all those rules, such as the change of T to that are applicable to weak terminations, hold in this case. b. After a final and the becomes 7, and the preceding is also changed to I, as off from शृ. भिन्न from भिद. Excrption-नुद, विद्, उन्द, त्रा, घा, and ही change the त to of optionally. The vowels of aft, TETT मिर विद्, and धृष्, undergo Guņa substitutes when they admit of . dl., Roots ending in 37 generally do not take , and lengthen their vowel when the nasal is not dropped ; as शम-शान्त, वम-वान्त, क्रम्-क्रान्त. There are a great many roots besides the Anit ones which do not admit of , and about which no general rules can be given. C. e.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 135 १ .. f. The nasals of यम, रम, नम्, गम, हन्, मन्, तन्, क्षण क्षिण, ऋण, and वन are dropped, as गत from गम तत from तन. 3. The active past participle is formed by affixing at to the passive; as कृतवान् from कृ; लब्धवान् from लम्. b. The feminine of this is formed by adding f; as praat. 4. a. The active participle of the perfect is formed by adding CTET Paras. and 17 Åtm. to that form of the root which it assumes before the weak terminations of the perfect, such as that of the third person plural. 6. When this form is monosyllabic, i.e. contains one vowel only, or when the root ends in आ, इ should be prefixed to TX; TET also admits, of ; -as ददिवस् from दा; पेतिवस् from पत् ; चकृवस्, चक्राण from कृ; जवस, जहाण from हृ. c. After गम्, हन्, विद्, विश, and दृश, वस्, takes optionally ; as जग्मिवस् or *जगन्वस from गम्. d. The form of the 3rd pers. plural of the Perfect should be taken as the base of the participle before the rowel terminations of the cases beginning with the accusative plural and before the ई of the feminine; as चिक्रोवस-चिक्रियुषा Instr. Sing. चिक्रियुवी.; जगन्धस् or जग्मिवस-जग्मुषा Instr. Sing. जग्मुषी . 5. The participle of the second future is formed by adding STT Paras. and HIT Âtm. to a form of that tense divested of its personal termination. The precoding 37 is to be dropped before अत्; as- करिष्यत्, being about to do. करिष्यमाण (active) being about to do. (passive) being about to be done. द्रक्ष्यत् being about to see. द्रक्ष्यमाण being about to be seen. The feminine of स्यत् is स्यन्नी. . * Seo page 49, Note.

·136 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. a. 6. car of the indeclinable past participle takes in the case of Set roots, and optionally in the case, generally, of Set roets ending in 377. h. 4,5,7, and 7 drop their final nasal optionally before the T of the indeclinable past participle, and the remaining roots out of those given in 2 f. above, drop it necessarily. ar is a weak termination, but in some cases when it takes, the rowel takes its Guņa substitute. 7. a. The terminations of the potential* passive participles are तव्य, अनीय, and य. 6. Before TU and 37 Tre the ending vowel and the penultimate short take their Guņa, TOT admits of in the case of Set roots. Before I the preceding and take their Guņa. ओ becomes अव; as कु-को-कव्य ; नेय from नी. (1) The ending 3T is changed to T, as a from T. (2) Roots ending in Te change it to its Vriddhi; as कार्य from कृ. n (3) , I, I, IT, and roots having a penultimate Te do not change their vowel before T. After a short vowel त् is prefixed to य; as स्तुत्य. There it'e' NOHHC exceptions to these rules, which are too various to be mentioned. 8, a. The affixes and 37# form nouns denoting the luer of the action expressed by the root; before the former the ending vowel and the penultimate short take their Guņa substitute ; and before the latter the ending vowel and the penultimate 3T (except that of Set roots ending in ) take Vriddhi and any other penultimate short, Guņa ; as नेतृ, नायक, from नी; वक्तृ, वाचक from वव, बोद्धा, बोधक from बुध, शमक from शम. चम् with आ forms आचामक. * These and the past participle ending in ñ are passive when the verb.is transitive; and active and in personal when the verb is intransitive.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 137 b. Roots ending in STT bave added on to them before this अक; as स्थायक,दायक, from स्था and दा. c. The feminine of तृ is त्री and of अक, इका, and ,sometimes अका. 9. a. 377, 37, and fi form abstract nouns from roots. b. ति is a weak termination. The roots before it undergo nearly the same changes as before the past participle, us वच-उक्ति; मुच-मुक्ति- Before 3T some roots take Guña and some Vriddhi; and before 3TT the ending vowel and the penultimate short take Guna ; as भू-भाव-भवन; जि-जय; बुध-बोध- बोधन. 10. Nouns ending in a are feminine and those ending in 3T are masculine, while those ending in 3TT are neuter, as a general rule. तस्मादेवंविदुषे ब्राह्मणायेवंचक्रुषे न क्षत्रियो द्रुह्यात्. राजा यक्ष्यमाणो ब्राह्मणं पुरोदधीत *छन्दांसि वै देवेम्पो हव्यमूडा श्रान्तानि जघनार्धे यज्ञस्य तिष्ठन्ति, यथाश्वो वाश्वतरो वोहिवांस्तिष्ठेदेवम. असुरैः सह योत्स्यमान इन्द्रो वरुणस्य साहाय्यं ययाचे. वरुणसाहाय्यं ले पस्तस्मात्सर्वे सुरा अविभयुः व्यर्थ मे जन्म, न मया कृतं कर्तव्यं, न भुक्तं भोक्तव्यं, न दृष्ट द्रष्टव्यं, न श्रुतं श्रोतव्यम्. निषेदुषी राज्ञों दृष्ट्वा दास्यो पि सपत्नीवृत्तं कथयिष्यन्त्यो उधस्तस्थुः * The metres of the verses repeated at a sacrifice are supposed to carry the offerings to the gods. 12sbs* ·138 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. ब्राह्मणेभ्यो दत्तसर्वस्वो रघुः प्रत्यनागतायाथिने धनं दित्सुः कुबेरात्तनिष्क्रष्टुं चकमे. कुबेरस्तु तेनाभियास्यमानमात्मानं प्रेक्ष्य स्वयमेव तस्य कोशे धनवृष्टिं पातयामास. तत्सर्व धन- मात्मने ददिवासं रघु वक्ष्यमागामाशिष सो र्युवाच. आशास्थमन्यत्पुनरुक्तभूतं श्रेयांसि सर्वाग्यधिजग्मुषस्ते । पुत्रं लभस्वात्मगुणानुरूपं भवन्तमीड्यं भवतः पिनेव ।। ततो रघुः पुत्र प्रापा नाम- तं कतिभिः संवत्सरैर्विवाहयो- ज्ञात्वा ससैन्यभिनुमतीस्वयंवराय विदर्भान प्रस्थापि- नवान्. मार्गे नर्मदारोधस्येकरात्रमूषितवतस्तस्य सेनानिवेशो वन्य- गनत्वमृषिशापात्समापेदानेन केनचिद् गन्धर्वेण तुमुलश्चक्र. तमापतन्तं नृपलेरवध्यो वन्यः करीति श्रुतवान् कुमारः। निवर्तयिष्यन् विशिखेन कुम्भे जघान नात्यायतकृष्टचापः। स *विद्ध मात्रः स्वीयं दिव्यं रूपं प्राप, ततः प्रजन्हुषे ऽप्या. मन उपचक्रुषे जाय संमोहनारख्यमस्त्रं ददौ. एवं तयोरध्वनि दैवयोगादासेदुषोः सख्यभचिन्त्यहेतु । एको ययौ चैत्ररथप्रदेशान सौराज्यरभ्यानपरी विदर्भान् ॥ तं नगरोपकण्ठे तस्थिवांसं तदागमनहष्टो विदर्भनाथः प्रत्यु- नगाम नगरं चानीय मटकी सक्रियां चकार. Valmika cursed the Nislâda, w co had killedt one of a pair of Krauncha lirds. The Rishi blessed the prince who had promised to give him a hundred cows. Vidura gare tho Pândavas some advice when they were about to go to Vâraņâvati. * The termination #ta as applica to nouns, means “only, siin ply," fa Gh15, "simply or only hit." + The student should use verbal derivatives for the words and expressions printed in Italics, ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 139 . Before he burned the town the General removed all the women and children from it. Before ordering that the money should be restored, to him, the judge counselled him to conduct himself properly. Before Yajnadatta was permitteto go away from Kâsh Devadatta told him to perform penances for the sins he had committed When she was about to be sent to her husband's house, Kanya told S'akuntalå to go round the fire, and counselled her not to be proud of her greatness. The book which is to be given to Vishnu is very good and costly. That treo is to be cut lomi. What is to be understool from the curious message he has sont ? Jarasandha, who had conquerol all kings and imprisoned thom, was killed by Krisliņa and Bhíma. His word is not trustworthy, and his dreds are reasurable. That is not an catable, nor a rinkable thing ; why should we seck it? He, having showa some signs of wisdom, is no more til regarılal as a fuul. VOCABULARY XIX. 3437 M. the name of Raghu's son. FH m3. the frontal globe on thi 377ign allr. and wj. very hier, upper part of the forehead of very long an elephant. 377 adv. down. awili 39, to do good. 37769 adj. in aceonlance witla. 15. a species of bird. 3T2NT m. a mule, HR with pia and sa to advance STT Tf. name. towards. f. the name of a lady. face n. a sigi. paints. proud. gry n. the country or ragiou 5970 n. a pluce near a town or of Gandharvas. village, or its boundary. F n. metre. HITZ fafaq to imprison.

·140 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. जनार्ध (जधन m. n. the hip, the ; विदर्भ m. (in plural) the name of hinder part of any thing, and a country. अर्ध half ) latter or hinder part. विदुर m. proper name. जरासन्धn. name of a king. विलक्षण adj. curious. धा with पुरस् to make one a fa- विशिख m. an arrow. •mily priest. हत् with सदाचारेण to conduct नर्मदाf. name of a river. one's self properly. faare m. the name of a wild zie f. raining. tribe or an individual of it. शाप m. a curse. पुनरतभूत (पुनरुक्त repetition and शास् with आātm. 2nd conj. to 279 become) like a repetition. wish, to bless. प्रत्यय adj. or uilt. recent, fresh. सत्क्रिया f. hospitality. प्रदेश m. a region. सपनोf. a fellow-wife. प्रदक्षणीक to go round. समीचीन adj. good. महाह adj. costly. संमोहन n. name of a miraculous रोधस् n. bank. weapon. बच् with आशिषम् to give a bless- | सर्वखा. सर्व all & स्व n. all wealth ing. or possession. वन्य adj. produced or existing in सेनानिवेश m. the camp of an a forest. army. वरुण n. god of the sea. सोराय n. good government. वारणावती f. name of a town. हव्य n. an offering. SELECTIONS FOR EXERCISE. I. (From the AITAREYA BRA'UMANA-PANCHIKA', 7.) हरिश्चन्द्रो ह वेधस पेवाको राजा पुत्र *आस. तस्य ह शतं जाया बभूवुः- तासु पुत्रं न लेभे. तस्य ह पर्वतनारदी ऊषतुः स ह नारदं पप्रच्छ; यन्विमं पुत्रामिच्छन्ति ये विजा- नन्ति ये च न । किंस्वित्पुत्रेण विन्दते तन्म आचव नारदेति ।। स एकया पृिष्टो दशभिः प्रत्युवाच; ऋणमस्मिन्संनयत्यमृतत्वं च गच्छति । पिता पुत्रस्य जातस्य पश्येच्चेज्जीवतो मुखम् ।। * Perfect of 378 'to be.' In classical Sanscrit it is used only as an auxiliary to form the Periplırastic Perfect. + Understand after this, JTØT 'a verse. * त् is optionally inserted between a final न and .

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 141 यावन्तः पृथिव्यां भोगा यावन्तो बातवेदसि । यावन्तो अप्सु प्राणिनां भूयान्पुत्रे पितुस्ततः॥ शश्वत्पुत्रेण पितरो ऽस्यायन्बहुलं तमः। अथैनमुवाच, वरुणं राजानमुपधाव पुत्रो मे जायतां तेन त्वा यता इति. तथेति, स वरुणं राजानमुपससार, पुत्रो मे जायतां तेन त्वा यजा इति. तथेति- तस्य ह पुत्री जज्ञे, रोहितो नाम. तं होवाचाजनि ते वे पुत्रो, यजस्व मानेनेति स होवाच, यदा वै पशुर्निर्दशो भवत्यथ स मेध्यो भवति; निर्दशो वस्त्वथ त्वा यजा इति तथेति. स ह निर्दश आस. तं होवाच, निर्दशो न्वभूधजस्व मानेनेति. स होवाच, यदा वै पशोर्दन्ता जायने थस मेध्यो भवति; दन्ता वस्य जायन्तामथ त्वा यजा इति. तथेति. तस्य ह दन्ता जज्ञिरे. तं होवाचाज्ञत* वा अस्य दन्ता यजस्व मानेनेति स होवाच. यदा वै पशोर्दन्ताः पद्यन्ते उथ स मेध्यो भवति ; दन्ता वस्य पद्यन्तामथ त्वा यजा इति. तथेति. तस्य ह दन्ताः पेदिरे. तं होवाचापत्सत वा अस्य दन्ता यजस्व मानेनेति स होवाव यदा वैपशोर्दन्ताः पुन यन्ते ऽथ स मेथ्यो भवति; दन्ता बस्य पुनर्जायन्तामथ त्वा यजा इति तथेति- तस्य ह दन्ताः पुनर्जज्ञिरे. तं होवाचाज्ञत वा अस्य पुनर्दन्ता यजम्ब मानेनेति- स होवाच, यदा वे क्षत्रियः सांनाहुको भवत्यथ स मेध्यो भवति, संनाहं न प्राप्नोत्वथ त्वा यजा इति. तथेति. स ह संनाहं प्रापत्तं होवाच संनाहं न प्राप्नोद्यनस्व मानेनेति-स तथेत्युक्त्वा पुत्रमामन्त्रयामास, ततायं वै मह्यं त्वामददादन्त त्वयाहमिमं यजा इति. स ह नेत्युक्त्या धनुरादायारण्यमपातस्थौः स संवत्सरमरण्ये चचार- अथ हैवाकं वरुणो नग्राह. तस्य होदरं जज्ञे. तदु हु रो हितः शुश्राव. सोऽरण्याट्राममेयाय. तमिन्द्रः पुरुषरूपेण पर्येत्योवाच, नानाश्रान्ताय श्रीरतीति रोहित शुश्रुम पापो नृषद्वरो जन इन्द्र इच्चरतः सखा || चरैवेति. चरैवेति वै . * 3rd pers. pl. Aorist of जन Vedic.

·142 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. मा ब्राह्मणोऽवोचदिति ह द्वितीयं संवत्सरमरण्ये चचार. सोड- रण्याङ्ग्राममेयाय. तमिन्द्रः पुरुषरूपेण पर्येत्योवाच, पुष्पिण्यो चरतो जो भूगुरात्मा फलग्रहिः । *शेरेःस्य सर्वे पाप्मानः श्रमेण प्रपथे हताश्चरैवेति चरैवेति वै मा ब्राह्मणोऽवोचदिति ह तृतीयं संवत्सरमरण्ये चचार. सोऽरण्याट्राममेयाय. तमि. न्द्रः पुरुषरूपेण पर्येत्योवाच; आस्ते भग आसीनस्योर्वस्तिष्ठति तिष्ठतः । शेते निपद्यमानस्य चराति चरतो भगश्चरैवेति. चरे- वेति वै मा ब्राह्मणो वोचदिति ह चतुर्थ संवत्सरमरण्ये चचार. सोऽरण्याठाममेयाय. तमिन्द्रः पुरुषरूपेण पर्येत्योवाच, कलिः शयानो भवति संजिहानस्तु द्वापरः । उत्तिष्टस्त्रेता भवति कृतं संपद्यते चरन् ॥ चरैवेति. चरैवेति वै मा ब्राह्मणोऽवोचदिति ह पञ्चमं संवत्सरमरण्ये चचार. सोऽरण्यााममेयाय. तमिन्द्रः पुरुषरूपेण पर्येत्योवाच, चरन्वै मधु विन्दति चरन्त्स्वादुमुदुम्ब- रम् । सूर्यस्य पश्य श्रेमागं यो न तन्द्रयते चरन् ॥ चरैवेति. चरैवेति वैमा ब्राह्मणो वोचदिति ह षष्ठं संवत्सरमरण्ये चचार. सोजीगत सौयवसिमृषिमशनया परीतमरण्य' उपेयाय. तस्य ह त्रयः पुत्रा आसुः, शुनःपुच्छः शुनःशेषः शुनोलाङ्कल इति. तं होवाच ऋषे ऽहं ते शतं ददाम्यहमेषामेकेनात्मानं निष्क्रीणा इति. स ज्येष्ठं पुत्रं निगृहान उवाच; नन्विममिति नो एवेममिति, कनिष्ठं, माता. तो है मध्यमे संपादयाञ्चक्रतुः शुनशेपे. तस्य ह शतं दत्वा स तमादाय सोरण्याठामभेयाय. स पितरमेत्योवाच, तत हन्ताहमनेनात्मानं निष्क्रीगा दति- स वरुणं राजानमुपस- सारानेन त्वा यजा इति तथेति; भूयान्वै ब्राह्मणः क्षत्रियादिति वरुण उवाच. तस्मा एतं राजसूयं यज्ञक्रतुं प्रोवाच तमेतमभि- षेचनीये पुरुषं पशुमालेभे- तस्य ह विश्वामित्रो होतासीज्जमदग्निरध्वर्युर्वसिष्ठो ब्रह्मा- यास्य उदाता- तस्मा उपाकृताय नियोक्तारं मविविदुः स होवा- * This looks like the 3rd pers. pl. of भी pres. tense (Vedic).

·SECOND BOOK OF SAN SCRIT. 143 चातीगतः सौयवसिर्मह्यमपरं शतं दत्ताहमेनं नियोक्ष्यामीति- तस्मा अपरं शतं ददुस्तं स *निनियोज. तस्मा उपाकृताय नियु- तायाप्रीताय पर्यमिकृताय विशसितारं न विविदुः सहोवाचा- जीगतः सौयवसिमयमपरं शतं दत्ताहमेनं विशसिष्यामीति. तस्मा अपरं शतं ददुः. सोसिं निशान एयायाथ ह शुनशेप ईक्षाञ्चक्रे सानुषमिव वै मा विशसिष्यन्ति, हन्नाहं देवता उप- धवामीति स प्रजापतिमेव प्रथम देवतानामुपससार. तं प्रजा पतिरुवाचामि देवानां नेदिष्ठस्तमेवोपधावेति- सोनिमुपससार. तममिरुवाच, सविता वै प्रसवानामीशे; तमेवोपधावेति. स सवितार मुपससार. तं सवितोवाच, वरुणाय वै राजे नियुक्तो- उसीति, तमेवोपधावेनि. स वरुणं राजानमुपससार. तं वरुण उवाचाग्नि देवानां मुखं सुहृदयतमस्तं नु स्तुह्यथ खोत्स्रक्ष्याम इति- सोनिं तुष्टाव. तमनिरुवाच, विश्वान्देवान स्तुह्यथं वोत्स्रक्ष्याम इति. स विश्वान्देवांस्तुष्टाव. तं विश्वेदेवा ऊचु- रिन्द्रो वै देवानामोजिष्ठो बलिष्टः सहिष्ठः सत्तमः पारयिष्णु. तमस्तं नु स्तुयथ त्वोस्रक्ष्याम इति. स इन्द्रं तुष्टाव. तस्मा इन्द्रः स्तूयमानः प्रीतो मनसा हिरण्यरथं ददौ तमिन्द्र उवाचा- श्विनी नु सुयथ त्योस्त्रयाम इति. सोश्विनी तुष्टाव. नम- श्विना ऊचनुरुषसं नु स्तुत्यथ त्योत्स्रक्ष्याम इनि. स उपसं तुष्टाव. तस्य ह स्मर्ग्युच्युक्तायां, विपाशो मुमुचे, कनीय ऐक्षाकस्योदरं भवत्युत्तमस्यामेवर्युक्तायां विपाशो मुमुचे, अगद ऐक्ष्वाक आस. II-त्रयाणां धू नाम. कस्मिंश्चिदधिष्ठाने मित्रशर्मा नाम ब्राह्मणः प्रतिवसति स्मः स कदाचिन्माघमासे पशुप्रार्थनाय ग्रामातरं गाः तत्र * Instead of the first syllable of the rout, the preposition seems to be reduplicated here. + This seems to be 3rd pers. sing. pres. Ped., though regularly it ought to be ईष्टे, or it may be taken as the infinitive of purpose. This stands for the hymu sung by S'unahs'epa in praise of Ushas or the Dawn.

·141 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. आगामिन्याममाव- तेन कश्चिद्यजमानो याचितः, भी यजमान स्यायां यक्ष्यामि यज्ञं तद्देहि मे पशुमेकम्- अथ तेन तस्य शास्तीत पीवरतनुः पशुः प्रदत्तः सोऽपि तं समर्थमितश्चे- तश्च गच्छन्तमवलोक्य स्कन्धे कृत्वा सत्वरं स्वपुराभिमुखः प्रतस्थे- अथ तस्य गच्छतो मार्गे त्रयो धूर्ताः संमुखा बभूवुः तैश्च तादृशं पीवरतनुं पशुं स्कन्धमारूढमवलोक्य मिथोषभिहितम- हो अस्य पशोर्मक्षणादद्यतनो हिमपातो व्यर्थतां नीयते. तदेनं वञ्चयित्वा पशुमादाय शीतत्राणं कुर्मः अथ तेषामेकतमो वेषपरिवर्तनं विधाय संमुखो भूत्वा तमूचे. भो भोः किमेवं जनविरूद्धं हास्यकार्यमनुष्टीयते, यदेष सारमे. योऽपवित्रः स्कन्धारूढो नीयते. ततश्च तेन कोपाभिभूतेनाभि- हितमहो किमन्धो भवान, यत् पशुं सारमेयं प्रतिपादयसि. सोऽब्रवीद्वान् कोपस्त्वया न कार्य, यथेच्छं गम्यतामिति. अथ यावत् किंचिदध्यान्तरं गच्छति तावद्वितीयो धूर्तः संमुखः समुपेत्य तमुवाच, भो ब्रह्मन् कष्टं कष्टम्; यद्यपि वल्ल. मोऽयं ते सारमेयस्तथापि स्कन्धमारोपयितुं न युज्यते. अथासौ सकोपमिदमाह, भोः किमन्धो भवान्, यत् पशु सारमेयं वदसि. सोऽब्रवीद्भगवन् मा कोपं कुर्वज्ञानान्मयाभिहितं. त्वमा. मरुचितं समाचरेति. - अथ यावत् स्तोकं वान्तरं गच्छति, तावत् तृतीयो ऽन्यवे- पक्षारी धूतः संमुखः समुपेत्य तमुवाच, भो अयुक्तमेतद्यत् त्वं सारमेयं स्कन्धाधिरूढं नयसि; तत् त्यज्यतामेष यावदन्यः कश्चिन्न पश्यति. अथासौ बहु विमृश्य, तं पशुं सारमेयमेव मन्यमानो भयाद्भूमी प्रक्षिप्य स्वगृहमुद्दिश्य पलायितः ततस्ते त्रयो मिलित्वा तं पशुमादाय प्रतस्थिरे.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 145 ब्राह्मणभुजङमयोः अस्ति कस्मिंश्चिदधिष्ठाने हरिदत्तो नाम ब्राह्मणः अस्य च कृषि कुर्वतः सदेव निष्फलः कालोनिवर्तते. अथैकस्मिन् दिवसे स ब्राह्मणी धर्मातः स्वक्षेत्रमध्ये वृक्षच्छायायां प्रसुप्तो नतिदूर वल्मीकोपरि प्रसारितं भीषणं भुजङ्गमं दृष्ट्वासौ चिन्तयामास, नूनमेषा क्षेत्रदेवता कदाचिदपि न पूजिता. तेनेदं मे कृषिकर्म विफलीभवति; नदहमस्याः पूजामद्य करिष्यामिः इत्यवधार्य कुतोऽपि क्षीरं याचित्वा शरावे निक्षिप्य वल्मीकान्तिकमुपगम्यो- वाच. भोः क्षेत्रपाल मयैतावन्नं कालं न ज्ञातं यत् त्वमत्र वससि, तेन पूजा न कृता; तत् सांप्रनं क्षमस्वेति- एवमुक्त्वा दुग्धं निवेद्य गृहाभिमुखं प्रायात्. अथ प्रातर्यावदागत्य पश्यति तावहीनारमेकं शरावे दृष्टवान्. एवं च प्रतिदिनमेकाकी समागत्य तस्मै क्षीरं ददात्येकैकं च दीनारं गृहातिः 10 अथैकस्मिन् दिवसे वल्मीके क्षीरनयनाय पुत्रं नियुज्य. ब्राह्मणो ग्रामं जगाम पुत्रो पि क्षीरं तत्र नीत्या संस्थाप्य च पुनर्गृहं समायातः. दिनान्तरे तत्र गत्वा स दीनार मेकं दृष्टा गृहीत्वा च चिन्तितवान्, नूनं सौवर्णदीनारपूर्णी यं वल्मीकः. तदेनं भुजङ हत्वा सर्वमेकवारं ग्रहीष्यामि एवं संप्रधार्यान्येाः क्षीरं ददता ब्राह्मणपुत्रेण सर्पो लगुडेन शिरसि ताडिनः- स च दैववशादमुक्तजीवितो रोषावू तं ब्राह्मणकुमारं तीवविधैर्दशने- स्तथादशत् यथा स सद्यः पञ्चत्वमुपागतः. अथ पुनरपि ब्राह्मणः प्रत्यूषे क्षीरं गृहीत्वा तत्र गवा तारस्व. रेण सर्पमस्तोत्. तदा सर्पो वल्मीकान्तीन एव ब्राह्मणं प्रत्युवाच, वं लोभादत्रागतः पुत्रशोकमपि विहायेतः परं तव मम च प्रीतिनोंचिता, तव पुत्रेण यौवनोन्मत्तेनाहं ताडितः, मया च स दष्टः, कथं मया लगुडप्रहारो विस्मर्त्तव्यस्त्वया च पुत्रशोक- 13 sbs ·SECOND BOOK OF SAINSCRIT. दुःखं कथं विस्मर्त्तव्यम्. इत्युक्त्वा बहुमूल्यं हीरकमणिं तस्मै दत्वा पुनस्त्वया नागन्तव्यमिति कथयित्वा विवरं प्रविष्टः, ब्राह्मणोऽपि मणिं गृहीत्वा पुत्रबुद्धिं निन्दन स्वगृहमागतः. III. (From BHARTRIHARI'S Ni'rr S'ATAKA.) अज्ञः सुखमाराध्यः सुखतरमाराध्यते विशेषज्ञः। ज्ञानलवदुर्विदग्धं ब्रह्मापि तं नरं न रजयति ॥ १ ॥ प्रसह्य मणिमुद्धरेन्मकरवक्त्रदंष्ट्राङ्करा- समुद्रमपि संतरेत्प्रचलर्मिमालाकुलम् । भुजङ्गमपि कोपितं शिरसि पुष्पवत्धारये- बतु प्रतिनिविष्टमूर्वजनचित्तमाराधयेत् ॥ २ ॥ लभेत सिकतासु तैलमपि यत्नतः पीडयन् पिबेच्च मृगतृष्णकासु सलिलं पिपासार्दितः । कदाचिदपि पर्यटशशविषाणमासादये- बतु प्रतिनिविष्टमूर्खजनचित्तमाराधयेत् ।। ३ ।। व्यालं बालमृणालतन्नुभिरसौ रोढुं समुज्जृम्भते छेत्तुं वनमणीशिरीषकुसुमप्रान्तेन संनद्यते । माधुर्य मधुबिन्दुना रचयितुं क्षाराम्बुधेरीहते नेतुं वाञ्छति यः खलान पथि सतां सूक्तैः सुधास्यन्दिभिः॥४॥ स्वायत्तमेकान्तगुणं विधात्रा विनिर्मितं छादनमज्ञतायाः । विशेषतःसर्वविदां समाजे विभूषणं मौनमपण्डितानाम् ॥५॥ यदा किंचिज्ज्ञोहं द्विप इव मदान्धः समभवं तदा सर्वज्ञोस्मीत्यभवश्वलितं मम मनः । यदा किंचित्किंचिदुधजनसकाशादवगतं नदा मूर्योऽस्मीति ज्वर इव मदो मे व्यपगतः ॥ ६ ॥ कृमिकुलचितं लालाकिन्नं विगन्धि जुर्गुप्सितं निरुपमरसप्रीत्या खादबरास्थि निरामिषम् । न ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 147 ~ सुरपतिमपि श्वा पार्श्वस्थं विलोक्य न शङ्कते न हि गणयति क्षुद्रो जन्तु ः परिग्रहफल्गुताम् ॥ ७ ॥ शक्यो वारयितुं जलेन हुतभुक छत्रेण सूर्यातपो नागेन्द्रो निशिताङ्कुशेन न समदो दण्डेन गोगर्दभौ। व्याधिर्भेषजसंग्रहश्च विविधैर्मन्त्रप्रयोगैविषं सर्वस्योषेषमस्ति शास्त्रविहितं मूर्खस्य नास्त्योषधम् ॥८॥ साहित्यसंगीतकलाविहीनः साक्षात्पशु पुच्छविषाणहीनः । तुणं न खादन्नपि जीवमानस्तद्भागधेयं परमं पशूनाम् ॥ ९॥ पेषां न विद्या न तपो न दानं ज्ञानं न शीलं न गुणो न धर्मः। ने मृत्युलोके भुवि भारभूता मनुष्यरूपेण मृगाश्चरन्ति ॥ १० ॥ वरं गहनदुर्गेषु भ्रान्तं वनचरैः सह । न मूर्खजनसंपर्कः मुरेन्द्रभवनेष्वपि ॥ ११ ॥ शास्त्रोपस्कृतशब्दसुन्दरगिरः शिष्यप्रदेयागमा विख्याताः कवयो वसन्ति विषये यस्य प्रभोनिधनाः । तज्जाडचं वसुधाधिपस्य सुधियो यर्थ विनापीश्वराः कुत्स्याः स्युः कुपरीक्षका हि मणयो यैरर्घतः पातिताः ।। १२ ।। हर्तुति न गोचरं किमपि शं पुष्णाति यत्सर्वदा- यथिभ्यः प्रतिपाद्यमानमनिशं प्राप्नोति वृद्धि पराम् कल्पान्तेष्वपि न प्रयाति निधनं विद्याख्यमन्तर्धनं येषां तान् प्रति मानमुझ्झत नृपाः कस्तैः सह स्पर्धते ॥ १३ ।। अम्भोजिनीवननिवासविलासमेव हंसस्य हन्ति नितरां कुपितो विधाता । नत्वस्य दुग्धजलभेदविधी प्रसिद्धां वैदग्ध्यकीर्तिमपहर्तुमसी समर्थः ॥ १४ ॥ केयूरा न विभूषयन्ति पुरुष हारा न चन्द्रोज्ज्वला न स्नानं न विलेपनं न कुसुमं नालंकृता मूर्धनाः ।

·18 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT, वाण्येका समलंकरोति पुरुष या संस्कृता धार्यते क्षीयन्ते खलु भूषणानि सततं वाग्भूषणं भूषणम् ।। १५ ।। विद्या नाम नरस्य रूपमधिकं प्रच्छन्नगुप्तं धनं विद्या भोगकरी यशःसुखकरी विद्या गुरूणां गुरुः । विद्या बन्धुजनो विदेशगमने विद्या परा देवता विद्या राजसु पूजिता न तु धनं विद्याविहीनः पशुः ॥ १७ ॥ क्षान्तिश्चेद्वचनेन किं किमरिभिः क्रोधोऽस्ति चेहेहिनां ज्ञातिश्चेदनलेन किं यदि सुहहिव्योषधेः किं फलम् । किं सर्यदि दुर्जनाः किमु धवद्यानवद्या यदि ब्रीडा चेस्किमु भूषणैः सुकविता यद्यस्ति राज्येन किम् ॥१८॥ सूनुः सचरितः सती प्रियतमा स्वामी प्रसादोन्मुखः स्निग्धं मित्रमवञ्चकः परिजनो निष्क्लेशलेशं मनः। आकारो रुचिरः स्थिरश्च विभवो विद्यावदातं मुखं तुष्टे विष्टपहारिणीष्टदहरी संप्राप्यते देहिना ॥ १८ ।। प्राणाघातान्निवृत्तिः परधनहरणे संयमः सत्यवाक्यं काले शक्तचा प्रदानं युवतिजनकथामूकभावः परेषाम् । तृष्णास्रोतोविभङ्गो गुरुषु च विनयः सर्वभूतानुकम्पा सामान्यः सर्वशास्त्रेष्वनुपहतविधिः श्रेयसामेष पन्थाः ॥१९॥ प्रारभ्यते न खलु विघ्नभयेन नीचैः प्रारभ्य विघ्नविहता विरमन्ति मध्याः। विनेः पुनः पुनरपि प्रतिहन्यमानाः प्रारब्धमुत्तमजना न परित्यजन्ति ॥२०॥ 'प्रिया न्याय्या वृत्तिर्मलिनमसुभङ्गेप्यसुकर- मसन्तो नाभ्यर्थ्याः सुहृदापि न याच्यः कृशधनः। विपाच्चैः स्थेयं पदमनु विधेयं च महता सतां केनोद्दिष्ट विषममसिधाराव्रतमिदम् ॥ २१ ॥ .

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT, 149 . क्षुक्षामोऽपि जराकृशोऽपि शिथिलप्रायोऽपि कष्टा दशा मापन्नोऽपि विपनदीधितिरपि प्राणेषु गच्छत्स्वपि । मत्तेभेन्द्र विभिन्नकुम्भदलनग्रासैकबद्धस्पृहः कि जीर्ण तृगमत्ति मानमहतामग्रेसरः केसरी ॥ २२ ॥ स्वल्पं स्नायुवसावशेषमलिनं निर्मासमप्यस्थिक श्वा लब्धता परितोषमेति न तु तत्तस्य क्षुधाशान्तये । सिंहो जम्बुकमङ्कमागतमपि त्यक्त्वा निहन्ति द्विपं सर्व कृड्रगतोऽपि वाञ्छति जनः सत्वानुरूपं फलम् ॥ २३ ॥ लाडलचालनमधश्चरणावपातं भूमौ निपत्य वदनोदरदर्शनं च । श्वा पिण्डदस्य कुरुते गजपुशवस्तु धीरं विलोकयति चाटुशतैश्च भुके ॥ २४ ॥ परिवर्तिनि संसारे मृतः को वा न जायते । स जातो येन जातेन याति वंशः समुन्नतिम् ॥ २५ ॥ कुसुमस्तबकस्येव द्वयी वृत्तिर्मनस्विनः । मूर्ध्नि वा सर्वलोकस्य विशीर्येत वनेऽथवा ॥ २६ ।। सन्त्यन्येऽपि वृहस्पतिप्रभृतयः संभाविताः पञ्चषा- स्तान्प्रत्येष विशेषविक्रमरुची राहुर्न वैरायते । द्वावेव असते दिनेश्वरनिशाप्राणेश्वरी भास्वरो भ्रातः पर्वणि पश्य दानवपतिः शोविशेषाकृतिः ।।२७ ॥ जातियर्यानु रसातलं गुणगणतस्याप्यधो गच्छतां शोलं शैलतटात्यतत्वभितनः संदरतां वन्हिना। शौर्ये वैरिणि वनमाशु निपतत्वर्थोऽस्तु नः केवलं येनेकेन विना गुणास्तृणलवप्रायाः समस्ता इमे ।। २८॥ तानीन्द्रियाणि सकलान तदेव कर्म सा बुद्धिरप्रतिहता वचनं तदेव । अर्थोष्मणविरहितः पुरुषः स एव अन्यः क्षणेन भवतीति विचित्रमेतत् ।। २९ ।। 13 sbs* ·150 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. दौर्मन्न्यान्नृपतिविनश्यति यतिः सङ्गात्सुतो लालना- द्विप्रो उनध्ययनात्कुलं कुतनयाच्छीलं खलोपासनात । हीमद्यादनवेक्षणादपि कृषि स्नेहः प्रवासाश्रया- न्मैत्री चाप्रणयात् समृद्धिरनयात्यागात्प्रमादाद्धनम् ॥ ३० ॥ दानं भोगो नाशस्तिस्रो गतयो भवन्ति वित्तस्य । यो न ददाति न भुङ्क्ते तस्य तृतीया गतिर्भवति ।। ३१ ।। राजन्दुधुश्चसि यदि क्षितिधेनुमेती तेनाद्य वत्समिव लोकममुं पुषाण । तस्मिश्च सम्यगनिशं परितुष्यमाणे नानाफलैः फलति कल्पलतेव भूमिः।। ३१ ।। यद्धात्रा निजमालपट्टलिखितं स्तोक महद्वा धनं तत्प्राप्नोति मरुस्थलेऽपि नियतं मेरो ततो नाधिकम् । तद्धीरो भव वित्तवत्सु कृपणां वृत्ति वृथा मा कृथाः कूपे पश्य पयोनिधावपि घटो गृहाति तुल्यं जलम् ॥ ३३ ।। रे रे चातक सावधानमनसा मित्र क्षणं श्रूयता- मम्भोदा बहवो वसन्ति गनने सर्वे ऽपि नैतादृशाः । केचिदृष्टिभिरार्द्रयन्ति धरणी गर्नन्ति केचिद्वथा यं यं पश्यसि तस्य तस्य पुरतो मा वृहि दीनं वचः ॥ ३४ ॥ अकरुणत्वमकारणविग्रहः परधने परयोपिति च स्पृहा । सुजनबन्धुजनेष्वसहिष्णुता प्रकृतिसिद्धमिदं हि दुरात्मनाम्।।३।। जाडचं हीमति गण्यते व्रतरुची दम्भः शुचौ कैतवं शूरे निपुणता ऋजो विमतिता दैन्यं प्रियालापिनि । 'तेजस्विन्यवलिप्तता मुखरता वक्तर्यशक्तिः स्थिरे तत्को नाम गुणो भवेत्सुगुणिनां यो दुर्जनैङ्कितः ।। ३६ ।। लोभश्चेदगुणन कि पिशुनता यद्यस्ति किं पातकैः सत्यं चेत्तपसा च किं शुचि मनो यद्यस्ति तीर्थेन किम् ।

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT, 151 सौजन्यं यदि किं निजैः सुमहिमा यद्यस्ति किं मण्डनैः सद्विदा यदि किं धनैरपयशो यद्यस्ति किं मृत्युना ।। ३७ ।। शशी दिवसधूसरो गलितयौवना कामिनी सरो विगतवारिज मुखमनक्षरं,स्वाकृतेः । प्रभुनपरायणः सततर्गतः सज्जनो नृपाणगतः खलो मनसि सप्त शल्यानि मे ॥ ३८ ॥ न कश्चिचण्डकोपानामात्मीयो नाम भूभुनाम् । होतारमपि जुहानं सृटो दहति पावकः ॥ ३२ ॥ आरम्भगुर्वी क्ष विणी मंग लव्वी पुरा वृद्धिमतो च पश्चात् । दिनस्य पूर्वार्धपरामिन्ना छायेव भैत्री खलसज्जनानाम् ॥ ४० ॥ मृगमीनसज्जनानां तृणजलसन्तोषविहितवृत्तीनाम् । लुब्धकधीवरपिशुना निष्कारणवैरिणो जगति ।। ४१ ॥ वाञ्छा सज्जनस यो परयुगे प्रोतिपुरी नम्रता विदायां व्यसनं स्वयोषिति रतिर्लोकापवादाद्भयम् । भक्तिः शूलिनि शक्तिरात्मदमने संसर्गमुक्तिः खले- येते येषु वसन्नि निर्मलगुगास्तेभ्यो नरेभ्यो नमः ॥ ४२।। प्रदानं प्रच्छन्नं गृहमुपंगते संभ्रमविधिः प्रियं कृत्वा मीनं सदसि कथनं नाप्युपकृतेः । अनुत्सेको लक्ष्म्यां निरभिभवसाराः परकथाः सतां केनोद्दिष्टं विपममसिधारावतमिदम् ।। ४३ ।। संपत्सु महलां चित्तं भवत्युत्पल कोमलम् । आपत्सु च महाशैलशिलासङ्घातकर्कशम् ॥ ४४ ।। ..

·152 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. संतप्तायसि संस्थितस्य पयसो नामापि न ज्ञायते मुक्ताकारतया तदेव नलिनीपत्रस्थितं राजते । स्वात्यां सागरशुक्तिमध्यपतितं सन्मौक्तिकं जायते प्रायेणाधममध्यमोत्तमगुणः संवासतो जायते ॥ ४५ ॥ नम्रत्वेनोन्नमन्तः परगुणकथनैः स्वान् गुणान ख्यापयन्तः स्वार्थान संपादयन्तो विततबहुतरारम्भयत्नाः परार्थे । क्षान्त्यैवाक्षेपरुक्षाक्षरमुखरमुखान दुर्मुखान् दूषयन्तः सन्तः साश्चर्यन्ना जगति बहुमताः कस्य नाभ्यर्चनीयाः ॥४६॥ भवन्ति नम्रास्तरवः फलोद्गमै- नवाम्बुभिर्भूरिविलम्बिनो घनाः । अनुद्धताः सत्पुरुषाः समृद्धिभिः स्वभाव एवैष परोपकारिणाम् ॥ ४७ ॥ श्रोत्रं श्रुतेनैव न कुण्डलेन दानेन पाणिर्न तु कङ्कणेन । विभाति कायः करुणापराणां परोपकारैर्न तु चन्दनेन ॥ १८ ॥ पापान्निवारयति योजयते हिताय गुह्यं च गृहति गुणान् प्रकटीकरोति । आपद्गतं न च नहाति ददाति काले सन्मित्रलक्षणमिदं प्रवदन्ति सन्तः ।। ४९ ।। पद्माकरं दिनकरो विकचीकरोति चन्द्रो विकासयति कैरवचक्रकालम् । नाभ्यथितो जलधरोऽपि जलं ददाति सन्तः स्वयं परहितेषु कृताभियोगाः ॥ ५० ॥ एते सत्पुरुषाः परार्धघटकाः स्वार्थान्यरित्यज्य ये सामान्याग्नु परार्थमुद्यमभृतः स्वार्थाविरोधेन ये । ते मी मानवराक्षसाः परहितं स्वार्थाय निम्नन्ति ये ये तुघ्नन्ति निरर्थक परहितं ते के न जानीमहे ।।५१ ।।

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 153 १ क्षोरणात्मगतोदकाय हि गुणा दत्ताः पुरा ते खिलाः क्षीरे तापमवेक्ष्य तेन पयसा ह्यात्मा कृशानी हुतः । गर्नु पावकमुन्मनस्तदभवदृष्ट्वा तु मित्रापदं युक्तं तेन जलेन शाम्यति सतां मैती पुनस्त्वीदृशी ।। ५२ ।। । इतः स्वपिति केशवः कुलभितस्तदीयद्विषा- मितश्च शरणार्थिनः शिखरिणां गणाः शेरते । इतोऽपि वडवानलः सह समस्तसंवर्तके- रहो विततमूर्जितं भरसहं च सिन्धोर्वपुः ॥ ५३ ॥ तृष्णां छिन्दि भज क्षमा जहि मदं पापे रति मा कृथाः सत्यं ब्रूयनुयाहि साधुपदवों सेवस्व विद्वज्जनान् । मान्यान्मानय विद्विषोप्यनुनय प्रच्छादय स्वान गुणान् कीर्ति पालय दु:खिते कुरु दयामेतत्सतां लक्षणम् ॥ ५४ ॥ मनसि वचसि काये पुण्यपीयूषपूर्णा- स्त्रिभुवनमुपकारश्रेणिभिः प्रीणयन्तः । परगुणपरमाणन पर्वतीकृत्य नित्यं निजहदि विकसन्तः सन्ति सन्तःकियन्तः ॥ ५५ ।। रत्नैर्महा स्तुतुपुर्न देवा न भेजिरे भीमविषेण भीतिम् । सुधां विना न प्रययुर्विराम न निश्चिनार्थाद्विरमन्ति धीराः ।। ५६ ।। क्वचिद्भूमौ शायी कचिदपि च पर्यशयनः कचिच्छाकाहारी कचिदपि च शाल्योदनरुचिः । कचित्कन्याधारी कचिदपि च दिव्याम्बरधरो मनस्त्री कार्यार्थी न गणयति दुःखं न च सुखम् ॥ ५७ ।। ऐश्वर्यस्य विभूषणं सुजनता शौर्यस्य वाक्संयमों जानस्योपशमः श्रुतस्य विनयो वित्तस्य पात्रे व्ययः ।

·154 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. अक्रोधस्तपसः क्षमा प्रभवितुर्धर्मस्य निर्व्याजता सर्वेषामपि सर्वकारणमिदं शोलं परं भूषणम् ।। ५८ ॥ या साधूंश्च खलान् करोति विदुषी मूर्खान हितान द्वषिणः प्रत्यक्षं कुरुते परोक्षममृतं हालाहलं तत्क्षणात् । तामाराधय सस्क्रियां भगवती भोक्तुं फलं वाञ्छितं हे साधो व्यसनर्गुणेषु विपुलेष्वास्थां वृथा मा कृथाः ॥ ५९ ॥ . IV. (From KA'DAMBARI', PART II.) *देव श्रूयतां यथावृत्तम. पृष्टतः स्कन्धावारमनुपालयद्भिः शनैः शनैर्वैशम्पायनेन सह भवद्भिरागन्तव्यमित्यादिश्य गतवति देवे, तस्मिस्तु दिवसे सुगृहीतत्वाद्वासेन्धनादिकस्योपकरणजातस्य न दत्तमेव प्रयागं स्कन्धावारेण. अन्यस्मिन्नहन्याहतायां प्रया- णमेयाँ सज्जीक्रियमाणे साधने प्रातरेवास्मान् वैशम्पायनो उभ्य- धादतिपुण्यं तदच्छोदसरः पुराणे श्रूयते, तदस्मिन् स्नात्वा * Târâpida was at one time king of Ujjayini, and S'ukanása, his chief minister. The former had a son of the name of Chandrâpida, and the latter one named Vais'ampåyana. These were brought up together, and there grew up between them a close friendship. When they became young men they took a large army with them, and over-ran the whole of India. They came to the regions bordering on a lake known as Achchhoda (limpid-watered), situated in the Himalayas. After a time, Chandràpida went home, leaving Vais'ampâyana and other generals in command of the ariny. One day Vais'ampâyana proposed that they shoull all go to Lake Achchhoda, and perform ablutions in its holy waters. They all agreed. Now, this Vais'uipayana had beon, in his previous life, the son of a Rishi. His name was Pundarîka. At this very place le had fallen iu love with Mahas'vetâ, the daughter of the kiog of the Gandharvas, but despairing of gaining the affections of a lady in such an exalted position, he went and hid himself in a bower on the margin of the lake. His friend Kapinjala, after a long search found him there, but observing the woeful change which his hopeless passion had produced in him, and being afraid for his life, went at once to Mahâs'vetâ and described his friend's condition to her. Mahâs'vetâ, who, also, had conceived an unconquerable love for Pundarîka, agreed to an interview, but before she could arrive at the bower, Pundarîka gradually sank and died. When Vais'ampâyana, therefore, went to the lake, he saw the bower in which, as Pundarîka he had died, and felt an innate and inexplitable affection for the place. This is related in the extract given in the text. The story is told to Chandrapiờa on his return by his generals.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 155 प्रणम्य वास्येव तीरभाजि सिद्धायतने भगवन्तं भवाभवप्रभु महे- श्वर शशाङ्कशकलशेखर, व्रजामो ; दिव्यजनसेविता केन कदा पुनः स्वप्नेऽपि भूमिरियमालोकितेत्यभिधाय चरणाभ्यामेवाच्छी- दसरस्तीरमयासीत. तत्र चातिरम्यतयैव सर्वतोदत्तदृष्टिः संचर, नमरकामिनीश्रीशिखरारोहणप्रयोचितैस्तरङ्गानिलाहतिवि- लोलवृत्तिभिः किसलयैरविरलकुसुममकरन्दलोभपुजितानां च मत्तमधुलिहां मञ्जुना शिजितरवेण दूरादाव्हयन्तमिव*, मर- कतमणिश्यामया प्रभयानुलिम्पन्तमिव समं दश दिग्भागानदत्त दिवसकरकिरणप्रवेशतया दिवाप्यन्तनिशीथमिव बिभ्राणं, चि- रपरिचितैरपि मेघोट्दमाशङ्कया मुहुर्मुहुरुन्मुक्तमधुरकेकारवैर्वन- शिखण्डिभिरुत्कन्धररवलोक्यमान, पदमिव जलदकालस्य, प्रति- पक्षमिव सर्वसनापानां, निजावासमिव जडिनो, निर्गममार्गमिव सुरभिमासस्याश्रयमिव मकरध्वजस्योत्कण्ठाविनोदस्थानमिव र- नेरास्पदमिव सर्वरमणीयानामनवरतचलितसुरभिशीतलाच्छोद- सरस्तरङ्गमारुतामिवीजिताभ्यन्तरशिलातलमन्यतमं तटलनाम- ण्डपमद्राक्षीत. दृष्ट्वा च तमतिचिरान्तरितदर्शनं भ्रातरमिव तनयमिवमुहृद- मिव चानन्यदृष्टिविस्मृतनिमेषेण चक्षुषा विलोकयन् स्तम्भित इव लिखित इव सुचिरमूर्ध्व एव स्थित्वा पारयन्त्रिवाङ्गानि धा- रयितुमाक्रव्यमाण इद मूर्खपोन्मुच्यमान इवेन्द्रिपैटिन्युन्मुक्ताङ्गः समुपविश्व भूमी किमप्यन्तरात्मना स्मरन्निवानुध्यायन्निव नि- विकारहयो गलितलोचनपयोधारासन्तानस्तूप्णीमधोमुखस्तस्थौ- तथावस्थितं तमवलोक्यास्माकमुदपादि चेतसि चिन्ता, येन-केन- चिदपहियन्त एव रसिकहदयाः परिणामधोरमतयो पिकिं पुनः कुतूहलापदे प्रथमे वयास वर्तमानातस्मानियतमियमस्येमा- * This and the other accusatives that follow qualify तटलतामण्डपम् at the and of the paragraph.

·156 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. मतिमनोहरां भूमिमालोक्य भावयतो हृदयविकृतिरीदृशो जाते- ति. न चिराच तमेवमवदाम वयं, दृष्टा दर्शनीयानामवधिरेषा, तदुत्तिष्ट सम्प्रति निर्वतयामः स्नानविधिमतिमहती घेला जाता, सज्जीभूतं साधनं, प्रयाणाभिमुखः सकलः स्कन्धावारस्त्वां प्रति- पालयन्नास्ते, किमद्यापि विलम्बितेनेति. स त्वेवमुक्तो ऽप्यस्मा- भिरश्रुतास्मदालाप इव जड इव मूक इवाशिक्षित इन वक्तुं न किंचिदपि प्रत्युत्तरमदात्. तमेव केवलमनिमेषपक्ष्मणा निश्च लस्तब्धतारकेण सन्तताश्रुस्रोतसा लिखितेनेव चक्षुषा लतामण्ड- पमालोकितवान्. पुनःपुनश्चास्माभिरागमनायानुबध्यमानस्तथितदृष्टिरेवास्मान् परिच्छेदनिष्टुरमाह स्म, मया तु न यातव्यमस्मात् प्रदेशात्, ग- च्छन्तु भवन्तः स्कन्धावारमादाय, न युक्तं भवतां चन्द्रापीडभुज- बलपरिरक्षितं गने तस्मिन् महासाधनं गृहीत्वास्यां भूमी क्षणम प्यवस्थानं कर्तुम्. इत्युक्तवन्तं च तमकस्मान्नाम किंचिदस्य दै. वादेव वैराग्यकारणमुत्पन्नमित्याशय सानुनयमागमनाय पुनः पुनः प्रतिबोध्य, तादृशासंबद्धानुष्टानेन जातपीडा निष्ठुरमप्यभि. हितवन्तो वयमेवं न युक्तमस्माकं स्थातुं, भवतः पुनर्देवस्य ता- रापीडस्यानन्तरादार्यशुकनासालब्धजन्मनो देव्या विलासवत्याङ्क लालितस्य देवेन चन्द्रापोडेन सहकत्र संवृद्धस्य तथा विद्यागृहे महता यत्नेनैशिक्षितस्य युक्तमिदं यज्ज्येष्टभ्रातरि सुहृदि वत्स- ले भर्तरि जगन्नाथे च, गुणवति च भवति सर्वमर्पयित्वा, गते, नत्परित्यागेनात्रावस्थानम्. कस्यापरस्येदृशो युक्तायुक्तपरिच्छेदः निष्टतु तावदस्माकं तवोपरि स्नेहो भक्तिर्वास्मिसु शून्यारण्ये भ- वन्तमेकाकिनमुत्सृज्य गनाः सन्तो देवेन चंद्रशीतलप्रकृतिना चन्द्रापीडनैव किं वक्तव्याः वयं; किमन्यो देवश्चन्द्रापीडो उन्यो वा भवांस्तदुन्मुच्यतामयं संमोहो, गमनाय धीराधीयतामित्यभि- हितो उस्माभिरीषदिव विलक्षहासेन वदनेनास्मानवादीत:- किमहमेतावदपि न वेधि यद्गमनाय मां भवन्तः प्रबोधयन्ति ·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 157 अपिच, चन्द्रापीडन विनाक्षणमप्यहमन्यत्र न पारयामि स्थातुमे- पैव मे गरीयसी परिबोधना. तथापि किं करोम्यनेनैव क्षणेन सर्वत्र विगलितं मे प्रभुत्वम्. तथाहि, स्मरदिव किमपि मनो नान्यत्र प्रवर्तते, पश्यन्तीव किमपि न दृष्टिरन्यतो वलत्यासक्तः मिव क्वापि हृदयं किमपि न जानाति,निगडिताविवान्यत्र पदमपि न दातुं चरणावुत्सहेते, कोलितेव चास्मिन्नेव स्थाने तनुस्तदात्म- ना त्वहमसमर्थों यातुम. अथ बलाद्भवन्तो मां निनीषवस्तत्रापि चलितस्यास्मात् प्रदेशादात्मनो जीवितधारणं न संभावयामि. अत्र पुनस्तिष्टतो यदेतदन्तर्हदये किमप्यवसीयमानं परिवर्तते मे, येनैव विधृतोऽस्मि, तेनैवावश्यं धार्यन्ते प्राणा इति चेतसि. तदलं निर्बन्धन; गच्छन्तु भवन्त अनुभवन्तु यावज्जीवमातृप्तेश्च- न्द्रापीडमुखदर्शनसुखम्. अल्पपुण्यस्य तु तन्मे प्राप्तमपि करन- लादेवमाच्छिध देवेन नीतम. इत्यभिदधानश्चकौतुकात् किमे तोनवं भाषसे, नायासि देवस्य चन्द्रापोडस्य समीपमित्यस्माभिः पुनः पुनः पृष्टो भ्यधात्; लज्जे हमेवं वक्तं, तथापि शपामि वयस्यचन्द्रापीडस्यैव जीवितेन यदि किंचिदपि जानामि यत् केन कारणेन न शक्रोमि गनुमिति. अपि च, भवतामपि प्रत्यक्ष एवायं वृत्तान्तस्तदनन्तु भवन्त इत्युक्त्वा तूष्णीमभवत्. VOCABULARY XXV. अगर adj. without disease, अद्यतन 2dj. of to-day, belonging healthy. to this day. अङ्कलानित n. (अङ्क m. lap, and अधम adj. low. अधिष्ठान n. a place. लालित fondled or dandled) अधोमुख adj. (अधस् down & मुख dandled on the lap. n. mouth) looking downward. Bypor n. a court-yard. अनक्षर adj. unlearned. Bufen adj. blamed ; censured ; अनन्यदृष्टि adj. one whose sight found fault with. is not directed towards any अग्रेसर m. a leader,wone who is other thing, looking steadforemost. fastly. अजोगत n. name of a Brahmana. अनय m. want of prudence. 14ss ·158 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. *aag adj. unblamable, praiseworthy. 797 adj. or adv. incessantly. 377 n. not taking care. faa n. wind. affanæ adv. always. Braca m. humility. 3ygu a adj. uninterrupted. By ay m. persuasion, civility. Byafaha adj. to be followed, to be done aecordingly. 3778 n. accomplishing. Brat pron. another. 377afta adj. separated, lost. para: adv. on the other day. 399XF n. infamy. stof adj. unsacred, sinful. 37 FOTO m. want of tenderness. 8749 m. what does not exist. fHT m. respectable birth. 34f#pe adj. facing, 37fHT m. exertion, application to business. opfhalfora (past. part. of 1757 10th conj. to fan, with a fu) fanncd. 919 m. a particular cere mony performed in the Râjasûya sacrifice, or the day on which it is performed. STATafra f. a celestial dam. sel. अमावास्या f. the thirtieth day of the month, the day of the new eta: ind. (ete value) from value. 3772ra adj. beautiful, white. अवधि m. space, limit. syafey adj. proud. 3 adu. necessarily. 3778A17 (pres. part. pass. of ÊT with 27a) what is being ripened. fara adj. thick. 27 f. hunger. 347aG adj. or n. absurd. Befeat f. non-forbearance. असिधाराव्रतn. a vow as sharp as that of lying on the edge of a sword. **675 m. destruction of life, death. 3710T m. a form. ette9 m. reproach, slander, 34 Ta adj. coming. 3194 m. sun-shine. SATCHCR7 n. self-restraint. 34 Tatian adj. liked by one's self. BITTE adj. intimate, one's own. 37791a adj.consecrated by repeating certain verses called Apri. 32 as adj. internal. TOT in. name of a Rishi. SYTETT f. desire, zeal. B18C n. a place. Stiefa f. striking, coming in contact with. g with afc, to be transformed. Tegn. fuel. Thug m. (#m. elephant and 773 m. lord) a very great clephant. 7 adj. giving what is desired. moon, STRE n. water. अम्भाजिनी f. lotus plant. BJUF n. iron.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 15.9 कङ्कण कत. aat f. or ages of the ilst conj. Atm. to endeavour, to aim. sfea adj. fit. en 6th conj. Paras. to throw. Crat f. anxiety, उत्कन्धर adj (उत् up and कन्धर m. or att f. neck) having the neck erect. 59 adj. last. Eron, a lotus flower. Dr n. dropsy, stomach. EGET m. name of a tree or its fruit, उहाट m. a sacrificial priest whose duty it is to sing Såmas or verses from the Sama Veda. CGAZA adj. one who is industrious. 77 adj. regretting, sorrowing for a lost friend. SOFTDT n. means and appliances, forage. evafot adj. benevolent. 39afa f. doing good to others. 698 m. satisfaction. egen adj. refined. steia adj. brought. 96 f. dawn, the goddess of dawn. उमन् m. warmth, hcat. #fsia adj. fat, stout. n. a bracelet. TWITT m. a religious mendicant. TOT19T adj. merciful. the marks on dice so called ; names of the four yugas द्वापार m. af m. world. FEUGIAT f. the creeper giving what is desired. कल्पान्त m. (कल्प m. duration of the world and 3779 the end) • the end of the duration of the world. afaat f. learning, poetry. at adj. distressed. aj na adv. woe! with fô 1st conj. Paras. tu flower Te . body. arettes adj. seeking one's own purpose. किंखित् what? färgsg adj. knowing a little. fotot m. a ray of light. færge m. n. tender sprout or foliage. citroen avlj, fastened as with a nail. (as prefixed to nouns) Dad, censurable. TO il. an ear ornament. कुतूहल n. ऊर्मिf a wave. #9 adj simple, straight, plain. #UT n. debt. TanianTuT adj. one whose property is certain, of an unvary. ing virtue. Tera m. descendant of Ikshvâku. giren adj. censurable.

·160 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRINO } ind. BUCT* m. bad examiner, bad appraiser. STU adj. low, poor, mean. arage'n. (afer in. a worm, ghi n. a group, swarm) a swarm of worms. ETTTT m. fire. afe f. husbandry. ar f. the cry of a peacock. केयूर m. an ornament worn about the elbow. wa n. fraud, deceit. ara n. the white esculent waterlily ; lotus. at with fag to buy off; to redeem ; to ransom. fra past part. of fift; wet. m. (m. pain, a m. a small portion) a small pain. 279 m. decrease. # adj. weak, emaciated. fegfa f. the earth. 277 n. milk. f. hunger. क्षेत्रदेवता f. (क्षेत्र n. a field, 2aat f. a deity) the deity of a field. गजपुङ्गव m. the best of elephants. EH m. a donkey. Na n. a wood, a thicket. qat fem. of TT, great, bulky. TeT m. reach, scope. 98 1st conj. Atm. to devour. Tie m. a morsel, a mouthful. ato n. the sensible horizon, a large collection. 9 m. n. sandal wood. TE M. n. a pleasing discourse. fa with eq to grow fat. far चिरम ind. for a long time. a ind. if. Ta n. covering net f. thigh. 9* n. a creature. ofta m. stupor, heaviness. Tin n. a collection: Gaze m. fire. J191 f. wife, woman. rrua adj. reviled, censured, abominable. जुम्भ with and उत 1st conj. Átm. to endeavour, to attempt to accomplish. gfefa adv. suddenly. az m. n. margin or bank (as of a lake or a river). 07 m. a fond name for any relative (a child or father). asta adj. belonging to him. app or an f. body. सम् 7am. thread. m. a wave. gose nom. verb (from gift f. laziness or stupor) to be lazy. तरङ्ग Ait n. a shrill sound, adj. shrill. analf. the pupil of the eye. ach adj. resorting to, or existing on the bank or margin. ZUUTI f. greed, coreto usness. CIUT 12. protection. ## m. hypocrisy. Toa n. tearing * m. a tooth. reaat m. dord of the day ; the sun. fat . the sun.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 161 ties. fear ind. by day. faêta n. n. one who binds or दीनार m. à particular coin (Roman). TaTfHHTFIT adj. “having the gi n. a place beset with diffi highest excellence, (Prof. culties and inaccessible. Benfey): where there is no gia adj. indigent, in adversity. contempt, respectful. दुग्ध n. milk. farq adj. incomparable. gf adj.- one who has a bad fagurar f. cruelty". mouth, one who speaks evil. fae adj. ten days' old (a grâce adj. vainly proud of child). one's learning fadry m. importunity, urgency. faarsat f. truth, reality. m. jaw. कु fa&TATUT m. the husband of ir n. bad or evil counsel. night, the moon. got adj. f. two-fold. farka past. pt. of a 4th conj. feu m. an enemy. Paras. with fa sharpened, धनपरायण adj. one to whom sharp. wealth is everything fa:R17 pres. pt. of wr with HITT f. continous flow, as of fã (2nd conj. sítm. Vedic) sharpwater ; edge. ening. 3797 m. a fisherman. faxr adj. harsh. y with 377 10 th conj. or causul, 792 living among men, fixed to know exactly, to resolve. to one place. ar m. rogue. 97 n. cyc-lid. 92. 4th conj. Atm. to drop, tra get adj. dim, gray. be dislocated, to fall; Causal, 1st conj. Paras. with 37, to with afa to think, to consi. contemplate, to meditate. der ; with ff to strike aferat f. a lotus plant. bargain. AT 4th conj. with ## Paras. 997 f. a road, a way. & átm. to prepare one's self, पझाकर 2. a collection of loties to make one's self ready. flowers. ATTE in. name of a Rishi. OTTİT77 adlj. one who bring: faufsa adj. fettered. about the good of others. fast adj. one's own (relations). afcm. cutting, discriminafata adv. greatly; exces tion, reproof, animadversion. sively. afcêtuat f. being in one's fax n. death, destruction. proper senses ; consciousness, faham. twinkling of the eye. afrada n. change. 14 sbs* 8 ·102 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 7 or near. - gfraffia adj. turning, changing. diable, self-willed, obstinate, qita adj. that which is absent ; perverse. not risible. gfaqet m. an enemy. qiqarTrn. a benevolent deed. Sayt n. answer. gelig m. & bedstead. 929 m. dawn, day break. Toftea adj. one round whom qufaa m. a great lord. fire has been carried. Fire is ETUT n. march. carried round the victim be- 559 m. fruit or product. fore it is slaughtered. STUTTETA m. destruction of life. qan m. the name of a sage. प्रान्तm. border. 919 adj. a fit object of charity. 979: adv. generally, ariel adj. standing by the side great f. seeking fata m. name of a Brah- पारयिष्णतम adj. able in the mana. highest degree to accomplish of adj. one who gathers any thing. the fruit or is benefited by it. at a causal of qt to protect ; 20817 pres. pt. pass. of giv, with 377 to take care of, to with 37, being pressed, being protect with care ; with afa urged. to wait for. m. a sacrificial priest whose 9037 adj. one who gives a duty it is to exercise a general morsel of food. superintendence over the perfagra adj. malicious. formance. fongal f. malice. HI to take, to resort to. परियहफल्गुता f. (परिग्रह. m. HT m. what exists. what one has got, and 4! भागधेय n. lot. useless or trifling) the trifling HIGUE 1. forehead. nature of the thing one has 19u ailj. crcadful. yot. भुजन m. a cobra. पीयूष r. nectar. 7 with 34 fa to overcome. gfs ga pust pt. of 957, gather-pet m. about to become. H7 f. a drum. grauit f. having flowers, fruitful. 7 n. medicine. 987: adv. afterwards, from #Ja f. ailj. producing enjoybehind, in the rear. ment. eu adj. magnificent, great. pt m. crocodile. FUTE m. acquaintance, regard. 7977897 m. the god of love. grafafaz past pt. of fax, with 0977 m. nectar, honey of yra & fa, inveterate, irreme flowers. भुजङ्गम, ed.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 163 orna- ** arlj. agreeable, sweet. #Ea no decoration or ment. AT adj. blind through presumption. 9 n. spirituous liquor. Aafet adj. intelligent. Fast adj. pleasing, charming. Htaa m. an emerald. HTY n. a desert country; a sandy-desert where there is no water; the country called Mâravada. adj. of great virtue or value. TFTY n. a large army. मान वराक्षस m. an evil spirit in the form of a man. fag: adv. mutually, with each other. Fatal f. garrulity. creant adj. sentimental, having a poetic taste. 11976 n. a sacrifice performed by kings. राध् with आ 10th conj. or aus. to propitiate. -T15 . a demon who on the eclipse day seems to devour the sun or moon. Tailj. harsh. fet adj. agreeaille, handsome. cirea n. name of the son of Ilaris' chandra. BTS m. a stick, a staff. 4 to get or design a certain animal as a victim to be sacrificed. Tanya n. indulgence, indulging. 19 f. spittle, saliva. faren past pt. of fen (6th conj. Paras., to write, to picture) painted, pictured. fuq oth conj. Paras. fere with 34T) to besmear. mita past. pt. of mi, concealed, hidden. pasta m. a hunter, a fowler. लोकापवाद m. censure of people, ill-repute. TEM.} a pearl. area n. an eye. Afaan. मूकभाव m. dumbness. TE f. swoon, fainting. terwar f. mirage. EUTSI an. 12. the stalk of the lotus plant. e m. name of a mountain consisting of gold. n. silence. 290 m. a portion of a sacrificial ceremany. 978: 110. with efforts. gafa f. a young lady or woman. atraa f. a woman. gaan. youth. Tfa f. love ; goddess of love Tam. a sound. ar n. mouth. वडवानल m. the fire supposed to exist at the bottom of the sea. a n. mouth. a tu m. god of water or the sea. ACA# m. 12. an anthill. aT f. fat, marrow. Faiq adj. blown out, developed, opened.

·161 SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. fara f. sickness, disorder, are 1. absence of worldly change of mental state. desires, disgust of worldly Fanfix adj. stinking. things. Fayfm. Nostility. a trga 3rd per. sing. nom. verb, fag caus: with fa to offer, to from ar; to be hostile. present. 279 m. expenditure विदेशगमन 1. (विदेश m. a foreign aren in. an elephant. country) going to a foreign aer f. shame. country. Te m. n. a piece, a part. faare m. removing (as pain); wa: ind. slowly. diverting. A Ng ind. happiness, welfare. faquelfafar oite who has lost acorda adj. one seeking re. his greatness or splendour. fuge. faqa m. bondage, tie. Tota m. a kind of pot. faus m. destruction. m. n. a thorn. fanfaar j. want ot' intelligcpce. T 11. a rabbit, a hare. fatfra adj. separated. ARTE TTTE m. the moon. विरोध n. opposition; अविरोध granietica adj. feasting on m. harmony, herbs. fa adj. astonished, abashed, RITA adj. dark, green. strange, curious. a trata adj. one who lies down famoat f. wife of Tarâpitla. and sleeps. fanta adj. moving, shaking. arra f. a particular kind of rice. fafay adj. of several kinds. farega m. a peacock. faxream. a slaughterer. fatista n. a tinkling sound. faqe 11. a country. for ferment adj. loose. faatum. n. al horn. farmhara . a collection of fazeeta . he who pleases stones. heavenly beings; Vishņu. sa TUT n. protection from cold. for adj. interrupted. a adj. cool. वृत with अति, to pass away. I. n. good disposition. gaie adj. one who has a liking ufa f. an oyster-shell. If adj. pure. for fasts and other devotional 37:93 M. a proper name. afa f. state, tecling, sustenance. Ia:29 11. a proper name. any m. son of Vedhas. m2. a proper name वेश for at m. name of S'iva. dress. वेष Į with fa to fade. ats. n. skill KTET M. a crest. VOWS. DATOTT } 917.

·SECOND BOOK OF SANSCRIT. 165 71 past pt. of 4, fatigued. 97 m. splendour. for or uit f. a line. Hotel adj. entire, whole, all. FTH m. nearness, proximity. TE m. attachment to worldly things, contact. 5 adj. ready, prepared. afer f. a good deed, hospitality. 7TH adj. best. Fragen adj. worthy of one's power or greatness. 89: adv. instantly, at present. Fara n. continuity. Tim, armour. FAC adj. all #gan m. contact. ghtfan. adj. respectable. szafara. m. hospitality. a m. folly, fascination. Hafaz, adj. one who knows every thing. efex adj. mightiest. Fam. restraint. संवर्तक m. a species of submarine fragt f. sand. fecigaa n. a holy temple. (as prefixed to words) good, well. patefaca adj. (Gulf. nectar) dropping nectar. सुरभिमास m. the month of the year called Chaitra. GreaR adj. intimate, dearest. rafe m. son of Suyavas. Fradi adj. golden Eurait m. art army or a divi. sion of it. gaam. a bunch. a adj. firm, immovable. le adj. little. ely a muscle. BT f. wish, desire. with fa, to forget; fa&a forgotten. atay n, a stream. m. a dream. BT m. a sound. fa f. a lunar mansion, name of a constellation, Fig adj. sweet, palatable. Ta adj. dependent on one's self. an expletive used in narrations. on ind. interj. expressing wonder or sorrow. fram m. name of a Brâhmaņa. fro5 m. name of a king. El Átm. with , to be sitting, Te te n. a ludicrous act. fF919 m. frost, snow. हीन or विहीन adj. destitute of. Trenfor m. a diamond, sa n. fire. fire. 919 m. company, living together with. Fifa f. the abandoning of connection, TITT In. the ocean. ja15a adj. wearing an armour. #1972 adj. ordinary. सावधान adj. (स and अवधान . attention), attentive. eng Bah.. comp. adj. of wonderful conduct. afran, literature, composition.